Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 34421:6c79e7c27d9b
Moved here from lisp/.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 11 Dec 2000 10:20:16 +0000 |
parents | 7ab25b4a077c |
children | 7c8d2cec3d08 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
33596
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999, 2000 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
40 #include "keyboard.h" |
764 | 41 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 42 #include "window.h" |
43 #include "commands.h" | |
44 #include "disptab.h" | |
45 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
46 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 47 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 48 #include "process.h" |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
32752
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
63 #ifdef macintosh |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
64 #include "macterm.h" |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
65 #endif /* macintosh */ |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
66 |
25012 | 67 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
68 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
69 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
70 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
71 |
25012 | 72 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
73 | |
74 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
75 #include <unistd.h> | |
76 #endif | |
77 | |
314 | 78 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
79 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
80 | |
81 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 82 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
83 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
84 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
85 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 86 |
87 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
88 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
89 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
90 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
91 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
94 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
95 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
96 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
97 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
98 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
99 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
100 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
101 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
102 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 103 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
104 #endif | |
25012 | 105 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
106 | |
29437 | 107 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
108 #include <term.h> /* for tgetent */ | |
109 #endif | |
25012 | 110 |
111 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
112 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
113 | |
114 struct dim | |
115 { | |
116 int width; | |
117 int height; | |
118 }; | |
119 | |
120 | |
121 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
122 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
123 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
124 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 125 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
126 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
127 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
128 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
129 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
130 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
131 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
132 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
133 struct dim)); | |
134 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
135 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
136 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
137 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
138 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
139 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
140 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 141 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
142 #ifdef GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 143 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
144 #endif |
25012 | 145 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); |
146 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
147 struct window *)); | |
148 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
149 struct window *)); | |
150 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
151 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
152 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
153 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
154 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
155 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
156 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
157 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
158 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
159 int, int)); | |
160 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
161 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
162 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
163 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int, int *)); |
25012 | 164 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
165 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 166 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
167 int)); | |
168 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
169 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
170 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 171 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
172 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
173 #endif |
25012 | 174 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
175 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
176 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
177 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
178 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
179 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
180 struct glyph_row *, int)); |
25012 | 181 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); |
182 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
183 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
184 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
185 static void sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows P_ ((struct window *)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
186 struct window *frame_row_to_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 187 |
188 | |
189 | |
190 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
191 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
192 scrolling. */ | |
193 | |
194 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
195 |
554 | 196 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 197 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 198 |
764 | 199 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 200 |
25012 | 201 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 202 |
203 int display_completed; | |
204 | |
25012 | 205 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
206 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 207 |
208 int visible_bell; | |
209 | |
764 | 210 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 211 |
212 int inverse_video; | |
213 | |
214 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
215 | |
216 int baud_rate; | |
217 | |
25012 | 218 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
219 is running. */ | |
314 | 220 |
221 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
222 | |
223 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 224 |
314 | 225 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
226 | |
25012 | 227 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
228 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 229 |
230 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 231 as a character code. |
232 | |
233 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
234 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 235 |
236 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
237 | |
238 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
239 | |
240 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
241 | |
25012 | 242 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
243 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
244 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
245 | |
314 | 246 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
247 |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
248 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table, Qredisplay_dont_pause; |
25012 | 249 |
314 | 250 |
25012 | 251 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
252 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
253 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
254 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 255 |
256 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 257 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 258 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
259 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 260 |
261 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
262 | |
263 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
264 | |
265 FILE *termscript; | |
266 | |
267 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
268 | |
269 struct cm Wcm; | |
270 | |
271 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
272 | |
273 int delayed_size_change; | |
274 | |
275 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
276 | |
277 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
278 | |
279 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
280 | |
281 struct window *updated_window; | |
282 | |
283 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
284 | |
285 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
286 int updated_area; | |
287 | |
288 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
289 | |
290 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
291 | |
292 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
293 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
294 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
295 | |
296 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
297 | |
298 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
299 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
300 | |
301 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
302 int glyph_pool_count; | |
303 | |
304 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
305 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
306 | |
307 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
308 | |
309 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
310 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
311 | |
312 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
313 | |
314 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
315 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
316 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
317 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
318 loaded on demand. */ | |
319 | |
320 int fonts_changed_p; | |
321 | |
322 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
323 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
324 | |
325 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
326 | |
327 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
328 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
329 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
330 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
331 | |
332 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
333 | |
334 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
335 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
336 | |
337 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
338 | |
339 | |
340 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
341 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
342 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 343 |
344 void | |
345 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
346 char *from, *to; | |
347 int size; | |
348 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 350 return; |
351 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
354 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
355 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
356 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
357 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
358 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
359 else |
314 | 360 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
361 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
362 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 363 |
364 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
365 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
366 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
367 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
368 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
369 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 370 if (to - from < 64) |
371 { | |
372 do | |
373 *--endt = *--endf; | |
374 while (endf != from); | |
375 } | |
376 else | |
377 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
378 for (;;) |
314 | 379 { |
380 endt -= (to - from); | |
381 endf -= (to - from); | |
382 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
383 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
384 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
385 |
314 | 386 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
387 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
388 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
389 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 390 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
391 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 392 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
393 } | |
394 } | |
395 } | |
396 | |
25012 | 397 |
398 | |
399 /*********************************************************************** | |
400 Glyph Matrices | |
401 ***********************************************************************/ | |
402 | |
403 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
404 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
405 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
406 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
407 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
408 | |
409 struct glyph_matrix * | |
410 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
411 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
412 { | |
413 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
414 | |
415 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
416 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
417 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
418 | |
419 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
420 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
421 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
422 | |
423 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
424 result->pool = pool; | |
425 return result; | |
426 } | |
427 | |
428 | |
429 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
430 | |
431 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
432 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
433 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
434 pointer was passed to this function. | |
435 | |
436 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
437 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
438 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
439 | |
440 static void | |
441 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
442 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
443 { | |
444 if (matrix) | |
445 { | |
446 int i; | |
447 | |
448 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
449 allocated. */ | |
450 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
451 abort (); | |
452 | |
453 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
454 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
455 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
456 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
457 | |
458 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
459 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
460 xfree (matrix); | |
461 } | |
462 } | |
463 | |
464 | |
465 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
466 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
467 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
468 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
469 or a float. */ | |
470 | |
471 static int | |
472 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
473 struct window *w; | |
474 int total_glyphs; | |
475 Lisp_Object margin; | |
476 { | |
477 int n; | |
478 | |
479 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
480 { | |
481 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
482 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
483 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
484 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
485 } | |
486 else | |
487 n = 0; | |
488 | |
489 return n; | |
490 } | |
491 | |
492 | |
493 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
494 window sizes. | |
495 | |
496 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
497 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
498 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
499 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
500 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
501 | |
502 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
503 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
504 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
505 MATRIX->pool. | |
506 | |
507 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
508 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
509 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
510 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
511 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
512 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
513 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
514 | |
515 static void | |
516 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
517 struct window *w; | |
518 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
519 int x, y; | |
520 struct dim dim; | |
521 { | |
522 int i; | |
523 int new_rows; | |
524 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 525 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
526 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 527 int left = -1, right = -1; |
34203
e55480843a8e
(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33763
diff
changeset
|
528 int window_x, window_y, window_width = -1, window_height; |
25012 | 529 |
530 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
531 if (w) | |
532 { | |
25546 | 533 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
534 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 535 } |
25546 | 536 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 537 |
538 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
539 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
540 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
541 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
542 { | |
543 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
544 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
545 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
546 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
547 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
548 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
549 | |
550 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
551 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 552 && !header_line_changed_p |
34279
7ab25b4a077c
(adjust_glyph_matrix): Don't reuse a window's current
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
34203
diff
changeset
|
553 && matrix->window_left_x == XFASTINT (w->left) |
25012 | 554 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
555 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
556 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
557 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
558 return; | |
559 } | |
560 | |
561 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
562 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
563 { | |
564 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
565 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
566 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
567 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
568 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
569 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
570 } | |
571 else | |
572 new_rows = 0; | |
573 | |
574 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
575 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
576 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
577 if (matrix->pool) | |
578 { | |
579 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
580 | |
581 if (w) | |
582 { | |
583 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
584 w->left_margin_width); | |
585 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
586 w->right_margin_width); | |
587 } | |
588 else | |
589 left = right = 0; | |
590 | |
591 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
592 { | |
593 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
594 | |
595 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
596 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
597 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
598 + x); | |
599 | |
600 if (w == NULL | |
601 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 602 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 603 { |
604 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
605 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
606 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
607 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
608 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
609 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
610 } | |
611 else | |
612 { | |
613 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
614 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
615 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
616 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
617 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
618 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
619 } | |
620 } | |
621 | |
622 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
623 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
624 } | |
625 else | |
626 { | |
627 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
628 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
629 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
630 || new_rows | |
25546 | 631 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 632 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
633 { | |
634 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
635 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
636 | |
637 while (row < end) | |
638 { | |
639 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
640 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
641 (dim.width | |
642 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
643 | |
644 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
645 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 646 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 647 { |
648 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
649 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
650 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
651 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
652 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
653 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
654 } | |
655 else | |
656 { | |
657 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
658 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
659 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
660 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
661 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
662 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
663 } | |
664 ++row; | |
665 } | |
666 } | |
667 | |
668 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
669 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
670 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
671 } | |
672 | |
673 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
674 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
31932
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
675 xassert (matrix->nrows >= 0); |
25012 | 676 |
677 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
678 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
679 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
680 when this function runs. */ | |
681 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
682 { | |
34203
e55480843a8e
(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33763
diff
changeset
|
683 if (window_width < 0) |
e55480843a8e
(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33763
diff
changeset
|
684 window_width = window_box_width (w, -1); |
e55480843a8e
(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33763
diff
changeset
|
685 |
25012 | 686 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, |
687 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
688 of the window. */ | |
689 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
34279
7ab25b4a077c
(adjust_glyph_matrix): Don't reuse a window's current
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
34203
diff
changeset
|
690 && matrix->window_left_x == XFASTINT (w->left) |
25012 | 691 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
34203
e55480843a8e
(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33763
diff
changeset
|
692 && matrix->window_width == window_box_width (w, -1)) |
25012 | 693 { |
694 i = 0; | |
695 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
696 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
697 < matrix->window_height)) | |
698 ++i; | |
699 | |
700 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
701 are invalidated. */ | |
702 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
703 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
704 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
705 | |
706 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
707 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
708 } | |
709 else | |
710 { | |
711 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
712 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
713 } | |
714 } | |
715 | |
716 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
717 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
718 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
719 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
720 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
721 | |
722 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
723 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
724 if (w) | |
725 { | |
34279
7ab25b4a077c
(adjust_glyph_matrix): Don't reuse a window's current
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
34203
diff
changeset
|
726 matrix->window_left_x = XFASTINT (w->left); |
25012 | 727 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); |
728 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
729 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
730 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
731 } | |
732 } | |
733 | |
734 | |
735 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
736 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
737 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
738 below). */ | |
314 | 739 |
740 static void | |
25012 | 741 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
742 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
743 int start, end; | |
314 | 744 { |
25012 | 745 int i, j; |
746 | |
747 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
748 { | |
749 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
750 initialization. */ | |
751 struct glyph_row temp; | |
752 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
753 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
754 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
755 } | |
314 | 756 } |
757 | |
25012 | 758 |
759 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
760 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
761 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
762 row structures are moved around). | |
763 | |
764 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
765 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
766 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
767 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
768 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
769 rotating right. */ | |
770 | |
771 void | |
772 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
773 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
774 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 775 { |
25012 | 776 if (by < 0) |
777 { | |
778 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
779 by = -by; | |
780 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
781 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
782 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
783 } | |
784 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 785 { |
25012 | 786 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
787 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
788 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
789 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 790 } |
25012 | 791 } |
792 | |
793 | |
794 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
795 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
796 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
797 | |
798 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
799 increment_matrix_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 800 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; |
801 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
802 { | |
803 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
804 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
805 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
806 xassert (start <= end); | |
807 | |
808 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
809 increment_row_positions (matrix->rows + start, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 810 } |
811 | |
812 | |
813 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
814 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
815 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
816 | |
817 void | |
818 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
819 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
820 int start, end; | |
821 int enabled_p; | |
822 { | |
31932
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
823 xassert (start <= end); |
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
824 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); |
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
825 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); |
081edde76197
(adjust_glyph_matrix, enable_glyph_matrix_rows):
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31850
diff
changeset
|
826 |
25012 | 827 for (; start < end; ++start) |
828 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
829 } | |
830 | |
831 | |
832 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
833 | |
834 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
835 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
836 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
837 enabled_p flag. | |
838 | |
839 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
840 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
841 | |
842 void | |
843 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
844 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
845 { | |
846 if (matrix) | |
314 | 847 { |
25012 | 848 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
849 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 850 } |
851 } | |
25012 | 852 |
853 | |
854 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
855 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
856 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
857 | |
858 void | |
859 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
860 struct window *w; | |
861 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
862 int start, end, dy; | |
863 { | |
864 int min_y, max_y; | |
865 | |
866 xassert (start <= end); | |
867 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
868 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
869 | |
25546 | 870 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 871 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
872 | |
873 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
874 { | |
875 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
876 | |
877 row->y += dy; | |
878 | |
879 if (row->y < min_y) | |
880 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
881 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
882 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
883 else | |
884 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
885 } | |
886 } | |
887 | |
888 | |
889 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
890 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
891 current matrix. */ | |
892 | |
893 void | |
894 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
895 register struct frame *f; | |
896 { | |
897 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
898 if (f->current_matrix) | |
899 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
900 | |
901 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
902 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
903 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
904 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
905 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
906 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
907 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
908 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
909 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 910 |
911 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
912 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
913 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
914 } | |
915 | |
916 | |
917 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 918 |
21514 | 919 void |
25012 | 920 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
921 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 922 { |
25012 | 923 if (f->desired_matrix) |
924 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
925 | |
926 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
927 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
928 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
929 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
930 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 931 |
932 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
933 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
934 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
935 } | |
936 | |
937 | |
938 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
939 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
940 | |
941 static void | |
942 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
943 struct window *w; | |
944 int desired_p; | |
945 { | |
946 while (w) | |
314 | 947 { |
25012 | 948 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
949 { | |
950 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
951 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
952 } | |
953 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 954 { |
25012 | 955 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
956 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
957 } | |
958 else | |
959 { | |
960 if (desired_p) | |
961 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
962 else | |
314 | 963 { |
25012 | 964 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
965 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 966 } |
25012 | 967 } |
968 | |
969 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
970 } | |
971 } | |
972 | |
973 | |
974 | |
975 /*********************************************************************** | |
976 Glyph Rows | |
977 | |
978 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
979 ***********************************************************************/ | |
980 | |
981 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
982 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
983 structure members. */ | |
984 | |
33527
c4c7abc48752
(null_row): New gloval static variable.
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
33101
diff
changeset
|
985 static struct glyph_row null_row; |
c4c7abc48752
(null_row): New gloval static variable.
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
33101
diff
changeset
|
986 |
25012 | 987 void |
988 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
989 struct glyph_row *row; | |
990 { | |
991 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
992 | |
993 /* Save pointers. */ | |
994 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
995 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
996 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
997 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
998 | |
999 /* Clear. */ | |
1000 *row = null_row; | |
1001 | |
1002 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
1003 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
1004 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1005 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
1006 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
30041
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1007 |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1008 #if 0 /* At some point, some bit-fields of struct glyph were not set, |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1009 which made glyphs unequal when compared with GLYPH_EQUAL_P. |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1010 Redisplay outputs such glyphs, and flickering effects were |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1011 the result. This also depended on the contents of memory |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1012 returned by xmalloc. If flickering happens again, activate |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1013 the code below If the flickering is gone with that, chances |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1014 are that the flickering has the same reason as here. */ |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1015 bzero (p[0], (char *) p[LAST_AREA] - (char *) p[0]); |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1016 #endif |
25012 | 1017 } |
1018 | |
1019 | |
1020 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
1021 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
1022 | |
1023 void | |
1024 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
1025 struct window *w; | |
1026 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1027 int y; | |
1028 { | |
1029 int min_y, max_y; | |
1030 | |
25546 | 1031 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1032 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1033 | |
1034 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1035 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1036 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1037 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1038 |
1039 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1040 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1041 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1042 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1043 else | |
1044 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1045 | |
1046 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1047 } | |
1048 | |
1049 | |
1050 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1051 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1052 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1053 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1054 ends. */ | |
1055 | |
1056 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1057 increment_row_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 1058 struct glyph_row *row; |
1059 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1060 { | |
1061 int area, i; | |
1062 | |
1063 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1064 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1065 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1066 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1067 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1068 | |
1069 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1070 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1071 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1072 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1073 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1074 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1075 | |
1076 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1077 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1078 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1079 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1080 } | |
1081 | |
1082 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1083 #if 0 |
25012 | 1084 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph |
1085 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1086 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1087 | |
1088 static void | |
1089 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1090 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1091 { | |
1092 int area; | |
1093 | |
1094 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1095 { | |
1096 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1097 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1098 | |
1099 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1100 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1101 | |
1102 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1103 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1104 | |
1105 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1106 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1107 | |
1108 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1109 { | |
1110 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1111 initialization. */ | |
1112 struct glyph temp; | |
1113 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1114 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1115 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1116 ++glyph_a; | |
1117 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1118 } |
1119 } | |
1120 } | |
25012 | 1121 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1122 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1123 |
1124 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1125 | |
1126 static INLINE void | |
1127 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1128 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1129 { | |
1130 int i; | |
1131 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1132 { | |
1133 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1134 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1135 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1136 } | |
1137 } | |
1138 | |
1139 | |
1140 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1141 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1142 | |
1143 INLINE void | |
1144 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1145 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1146 { | |
1147 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1148 | |
1149 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1150 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1151 | |
1152 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1153 *to = *from; | |
1154 | |
1155 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1156 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1157 } | |
1158 | |
1159 | |
1160 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1161 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1162 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1163 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1164 | |
1165 void | |
1166 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1167 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1168 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1169 { | |
1170 int area; | |
1171 | |
1172 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1173 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1174 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1175 | |
1176 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1177 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1178 if (from->used[area]) | |
1179 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1180 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1181 | |
1182 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1183 increment_row_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 1184 } |
1185 | |
1186 | |
1187 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1188 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1189 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1190 a memory leak. */ | |
1191 | |
1192 static INLINE void | |
1193 assign_row (to, from) | |
1194 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1195 { | |
1196 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1197 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1198 } | |
1199 | |
1200 | |
1201 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1202 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1203 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1204 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1205 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1206 | |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1207 #ifdef GLYPH_DEBUG |
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1208 |
25012 | 1209 static int |
1210 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1211 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1212 { | |
1213 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1214 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1215 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1216 | |
1217 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1218 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1219 } | |
1220 | |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1221 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ |
25012 | 1222 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1223 #if 0 |
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1224 |
25012 | 1225 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice |
1226 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1227 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1228 | |
1229 static struct glyph_row * | |
1230 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1231 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1232 int row; | |
1233 { | |
1234 int i; | |
1235 | |
1236 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1237 | |
1238 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1239 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1240 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1241 break; | |
1242 | |
1243 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1244 } | |
1245 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1246 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1247 |
1248 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1249 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1250 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1251 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1252 | |
1253 void | |
1254 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1255 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1256 { | |
1257 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1258 { | |
1259 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1260 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1261 } | |
1262 } | |
1263 | |
1264 | |
1265 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1266 | |
1267 int | |
1268 line_hash_code (row) | |
1269 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1270 { | |
1271 int hash = 0; | |
1272 | |
1273 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1274 { | |
1275 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1276 { | |
1277 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1278 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1279 hash = -1; | |
1280 } | |
1281 else | |
1282 { | |
1283 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1284 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1285 | |
1286 while (glyph < end) | |
1287 { | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1288 int c = glyph->u.ch; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1289 int face_id = glyph->face_id; |
25012 | 1290 if (must_write_spaces) |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1291 c -= SPACEGLYPH; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1292 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + c; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1293 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + face_id; |
25012 | 1294 ++glyph; |
1295 } | |
1296 | |
1297 if (hash == 0) | |
1298 hash = 1; | |
1299 } | |
1300 } | |
1301 | |
1302 return hash; | |
1303 } | |
1304 | |
1305 | |
1306 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1307 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1308 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1309 | |
1310 static unsigned int | |
1311 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1312 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1313 int vpos; | |
1314 { | |
1315 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1316 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1317 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1318 int len; | |
1319 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1320 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1321 | |
1322 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1323 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1324 { | |
1325 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
34203
e55480843a8e
(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33763
diff
changeset
|
1326 while (end > beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*(end - 1))) |
25012 | 1327 --end; |
1328 | |
1329 /* All blank line. */ | |
1330 if (end == beg) | |
1331 return 0; | |
1332 | |
1333 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1334 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1335 ++beg; | |
1336 } | |
1337 | |
1338 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1339 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1340 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1341 len = end - beg; | |
1342 else | |
1343 { | |
1344 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1345 in LEN. */ | |
1346 len = 0; | |
1347 while (beg < end) | |
1348 { | |
1349 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1350 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1351 if (g < 0 |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1352 || GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) |
25012 | 1353 len += 1; |
1354 else | |
1355 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1356 | |
1357 ++beg; | |
1358 } | |
1359 } | |
1360 | |
1361 return len; | |
1362 } | |
1363 | |
1364 | |
1365 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1366 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1367 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1368 visibility. MOUSE_FACE_P non-zero means compare the mouse_face_p |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1369 flags of A and B, too. */ |
25012 | 1370 |
1371 static INLINE int | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1372 row_equal_p (w, a, b, mouse_face_p) |
25012 | 1373 struct window *w; |
1374 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1375 int mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 1376 { |
1377 if (a == b) | |
1378 return 1; | |
1379 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1380 return 0; | |
1381 else | |
1382 { | |
1383 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1384 int area; | |
1385 | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1386 if (mouse_face_p && a->mouse_face_p != b->mouse_face_p) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1387 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1388 |
25012 | 1389 /* Compare glyphs. */ |
1390 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1391 { | |
1392 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1393 return 0; | |
1394 | |
1395 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1396 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1397 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1398 | |
1399 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1400 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1401 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1402 | |
1403 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1404 return 0; | |
1405 } | |
1406 | |
1407 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1408 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1409 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1410 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1411 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1412 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1413 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1414 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1415 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1416 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1417 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1418 || a->x != b->x | |
1419 /* Different height. */ | |
1420 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1421 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1422 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1423 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1424 return 0; | |
1425 } | |
1426 | |
1427 return 1; | |
1428 } | |
1429 | |
1430 | |
314 | 1431 |
25012 | 1432 /*********************************************************************** |
1433 Glyph Pool | |
1434 | |
1435 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1436 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1437 | |
1438 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1439 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1440 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1441 | |
1442 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1443 new_glyph_pool () | |
1444 { | |
1445 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1446 | |
1447 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1448 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1449 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1450 | |
1451 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1452 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1453 | |
1454 return result; | |
1455 } | |
1456 | |
1457 | |
1458 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1459 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1460 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1461 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1462 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1463 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1464 | |
1465 static void | |
1466 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1467 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1468 { | |
1469 if (pool) | |
1470 { | |
1471 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1472 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1473 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1474 | |
1475 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1476 xfree (pool); | |
1477 } | |
1478 } | |
1479 | |
1480 | |
1481 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1482 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1483 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1484 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1485 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1486 | |
1487 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1488 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1489 | |
1490 static int | |
1491 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1492 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1493 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1494 { | |
1495 int needed; | |
1496 int changed_p; | |
1497 | |
1498 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1499 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1500 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1501 | |
1502 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1503 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1504 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1505 { | |
1506 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1507 | |
1508 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1509 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1510 else | |
1511 { | |
1512 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1513 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1514 } | |
1515 | |
1516 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1517 } | |
1518 | |
1519 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1520 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1521 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1522 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1523 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1524 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1525 | |
1526 return changed_p; | |
1527 } | |
1528 | |
1529 | |
1530 | |
1531 /*********************************************************************** | |
1532 Debug Code | |
1533 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1534 | |
1535 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1536 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1537 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1538 /* Flush standard output. This is sometimes useful to call from |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1539 the debugger. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1540 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1541 void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1542 flush_stdout () |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1543 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1544 fflush (stdout); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1545 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1546 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1547 |
25012 | 1548 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a |
1549 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1550 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1551 MATRIX. */ | |
1552 | |
1553 void | |
1554 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1555 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1556 { | |
1557 int i, j; | |
1558 | |
1559 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1560 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1561 xassert (i == j | |
1562 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1563 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1564 } | |
1565 | |
1566 | |
1567 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1568 | |
1569 struct glyph_row * | |
1570 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1571 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1572 int row; | |
1573 { | |
1574 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1575 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1576 | |
1577 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1578 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1579 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1580 #if 0 |
25012 | 1581 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1582 #endif | |
1583 | |
1584 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1585 } | |
1586 | |
1587 | |
1588 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1589 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1590 nevertheless. */ | |
1591 | |
1592 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1593 window W. */ | |
1594 | |
1595 static void | |
1596 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1597 struct window *w; |
1598 { | |
25012 | 1599 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1600 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1601 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1602 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1603 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1604 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1605 int c; | |
1606 | |
1607 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1608 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1609 return; | |
1610 | |
1611 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1612 | |
1613 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1614 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1615 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1616 { | |
1617 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1618 | |
1619 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1620 last_text_row = row; | |
1621 | |
1622 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1623 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1624 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1625 | |
1626 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1627 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1628 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1629 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1630 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1631 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1632 | |
1633 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1634 of next row. */ | |
1635 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1636 { | |
1637 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1638 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1639 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1640 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1641 } | |
1642 row = next; | |
1643 } | |
1644 | |
1645 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1646 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1647 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1648 } | |
1649 | |
1650 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1651 | |
1652 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1653 | |
1654 | |
1655 | |
1656 /********************************************************************** | |
1657 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1658 **********************************************************************/ | |
1659 | |
1660 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1661 redisplay | |
1662 | |
1663 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1664 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1665 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1666 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1667 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1668 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1669 performed. | |
1670 | |
1671 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1672 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1673 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1674 | |
1675 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1676 | |
1677 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1678 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1679 | |
1680 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1681 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1682 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1683 | |
1684 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1685 function. | |
1686 | |
1687 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1688 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1689 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1690 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1691 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1692 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1693 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1694 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1695 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1696 | |
1697 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1698 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1699 necessary. | |
1700 | |
1701 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1702 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1703 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1704 windows in the sequence. | |
1705 | |
1706 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1707 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1708 | | | | | | |
1709 | | | | | |
1710 +---------+ | | result height | |
1711 | +---------+ | |
1712 | | | | |
1713 +----------+ --- | |
1714 | |
1715 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1716 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1717 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1718 | |
1719 |<---- result width -->| | |
1720 +---------+ --- | |
1721 | | | | |
1722 | | | | |
1723 +---------+--+ | | |
1724 | | | | |
1725 | | result height | |
1726 | | | |
1727 +------------+---------+ | | |
1728 | | | | |
1729 | | | | |
1730 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1731 | |
1732 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1733 allocated. */ | |
1734 | |
1735 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1736 | |
1737 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1738 size. */ | |
1739 | |
1740 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1741 | |
1742 static struct dim | |
1743 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1744 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1745 Lisp_Object window; | |
1746 int x, y; | |
1747 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1748 int dim_only_p; | |
1749 int *window_change_flags; | |
1750 { | |
1751 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1752 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1753 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1754 struct dim total; | |
1755 struct dim dim; | |
1756 struct window *w; | |
1757 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1758 | |
1759 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1760 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1761 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1762 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1763 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1764 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1765 in_horz_combination_p | |
1766 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1767 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1768 | |
1769 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1770 do | |
1771 { | |
1772 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1773 | |
1774 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1775 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1776 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1777 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1778 dim_only_p, | |
1779 window_change_flags); | |
1780 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1781 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1782 dim_only_p, | |
1783 window_change_flags); | |
1784 else | |
1785 { | |
1786 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1787 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1788 { | |
1789 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1790 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1791 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1792 } | |
1793 | |
1794 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1795 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1796 dim.width = XINT (w->width); |
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1797 dim.height = XINT (w->height); |
25012 | 1798 |
1799 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1800 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1801 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1802 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1803 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1804 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1805 w->right_margin_width) | |
1806 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1807 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1808 w->left_margin_width) | |
1809 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1810 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1811 | |
1812 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1813 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1814 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1815 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1816 necessary. */ | |
1817 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1818 { | |
1819 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1820 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1821 } | |
1822 } | |
1823 | |
1824 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1825 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1826 below W. */ | |
1827 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1828 x += dim.width; | |
1829 else | |
1830 y += dim.height; | |
1831 | |
1832 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1833 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1834 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1835 | |
1836 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1837 window = w->next; | |
1838 } | |
1839 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1840 | |
1841 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1842 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1843 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1844 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1845 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1846 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1847 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1848 { | |
1849 total.width = x - x0; | |
1850 total.height = hmax; | |
1851 } | |
1852 else | |
1853 { | |
1854 total.width = wmax; | |
1855 total.height = y - y0; | |
1856 } | |
1857 | |
1858 return total; | |
1859 } | |
1860 | |
1861 | |
1862 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1863 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1864 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1865 | |
1866 static void | |
1867 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1868 struct window *w; | |
1869 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1870 { | |
1871 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1872 | |
1873 while (w) | |
314 | 1874 { |
25012 | 1875 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1876 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1877 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1878 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1879 else | |
314 | 1880 { |
25012 | 1881 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1882 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1883 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1884 struct dim dim; | |
1885 | |
1886 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1887 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1888 { |
25012 | 1889 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1890 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1891 } |
25012 | 1892 |
1893 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1894 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1895 / ch_dim.width) | |
1896 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1897 + 2 | |
1898 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1899 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1900 + 1 + 1); | |
1901 | |
1902 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1903 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1904 / ch_dim.height) | |
1905 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1906 bottom of the window. */ | |
1907 + 2 | |
1908 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1909 + 2); | |
1910 | |
1911 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1912 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1913 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1914 } | |
1915 | |
1916 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1917 } | |
1918 } | |
1919 | |
1920 | |
1921 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1922 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1923 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1924 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1925 | |
1926 void | |
1927 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1928 struct frame *f; | |
1929 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1930 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1931 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1932 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1933 |
25012 | 1934 if (f) |
1935 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1936 else | |
1937 { | |
1938 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1939 | |
1940 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1941 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1942 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1943 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1944 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1945 } |
1946 | |
1947 | |
1948 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1949 | |
1950 To be called from init_display. | |
1951 | |
1952 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1953 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1954 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1955 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1956 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1957 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1958 | |
1959 static void | |
1960 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1961 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1962 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1963 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1964 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1965 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1966 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1967 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1968 |
1969 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1970 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1971 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1972 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1973 |
1974 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1975 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1976 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1977 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1978 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1979 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1980 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1981 } | |
1982 | |
1983 | |
1984 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1985 | |
1986 static void | |
1987 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1988 struct frame *f; | |
1989 { | |
1990 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1991 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1992 else | |
1993 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1994 | |
1995 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1996 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1997 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1998 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1999 | |
2000 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
2001 } | |
2002 | |
2003 | |
2004 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2005 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
2006 | |
2007 static void | |
2008 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
2009 struct frame *f; | |
2010 { | |
2011 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2012 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
2013 int pool_changed_p; | |
2014 int window_change_flags; | |
2015 int top_window_y; | |
2016 | |
2017 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
2018 return; | |
2019 | |
2020 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
2021 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
2022 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2023 | |
2024 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
2025 | |
2026 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
2027 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
2028 { | |
2029 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2030 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2031 } | |
2032 | |
2033 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
2034 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
2035 { | |
2036 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
2037 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
2038 } | |
2039 | |
2040 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
2041 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
2042 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
2043 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
2044 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
2045 matrix. */ | |
2046 window_change_flags = 0; | |
2047 matrix_dim | |
2048 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2049 0, top_window_y, | |
2050 ch_dim, 1, | |
2051 &window_change_flags); | |
2052 | |
2053 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2054 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2055 | |
2056 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2057 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2058 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2059 | |
2060 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2061 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2062 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2063 { | |
2064 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2065 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2066 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2067 &window_change_flags); | |
2068 | |
2069 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2070 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2071 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2072 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2073 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2074 | |
2075 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2076 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2077 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2078 | |
2079 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2080 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2081 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2082 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2083 } | |
2084 } | |
2085 | |
2086 | |
2087 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2088 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2089 | |
2090 static void | |
2091 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2092 struct frame *f; | |
2093 { | |
2094 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2095 struct window *w; | |
2096 | |
2097 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2098 | |
2099 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2100 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2101 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2102 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2103 #else | |
2104 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2105 #endif | |
2106 | |
2107 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2108 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2109 ch_dim); | |
2110 | |
2111 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2112 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2113 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2114 { | |
2115 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2116 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2117 { | |
2118 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2119 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2120 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2121 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2122 } | |
2123 else | |
2124 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2125 | |
2126 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2127 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2128 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2129 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2130 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2131 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2132 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2133 } | |
2134 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2135 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2136 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2137 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2138 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2139 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2140 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2141 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2142 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2143 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2144 } | |
2145 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2146 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2147 |
2148 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2149 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2150 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2151 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2152 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2153 } | |
2154 | |
2155 | |
2156 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2157 | |
2158 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2159 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2160 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2161 | |
2162 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2163 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2164 | |
2165 static void | |
2166 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2167 struct frame *f; | |
2168 { | |
2169 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2170 | |
2171 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2172 { | |
2173 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2174 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2175 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2176 } | |
2177 else | |
2178 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2179 } | |
2180 | |
2181 | |
2182 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2183 | |
2184 static void | |
2185 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2186 struct frame *f; | |
2187 { | |
2188 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2189 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2190 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2191 } | |
2192 | |
2193 | |
2194 | |
2195 /********************************************************************** | |
2196 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2197 **********************************************************************/ | |
2198 | |
2199 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2200 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2201 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2202 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2203 | |
2204 void | |
2205 free_glyphs (f) | |
2206 struct frame *f; | |
2207 { | |
2208 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2209 { | |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2210 /* Block interrupt input so that we don't get surprised by an X |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2211 event while we're in an inconsistent state. */ |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2212 BLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 2213 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; |
2214 | |
2215 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2216 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2217 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2218 | |
2219 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2220 glyph matrices. */ | |
2221 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2222 { | |
2223 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2224 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2225 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2226 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2227 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2228 } | |
2229 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2230 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2231 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2232 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2233 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2234 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2235 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2236 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2237 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2238 } |
2239 | |
2240 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2241 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2242 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2243 { | |
2244 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2245 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2246 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2247 } | |
2248 | |
2249 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2250 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2251 { | |
2252 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2253 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2254 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2255 } |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2256 |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2257 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
314 | 2258 } |
2259 } | |
2260 | |
25012 | 2261 |
2262 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2263 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2264 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2265 | |
2266 void | |
2267 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2268 struct window *w; | |
2269 { | |
2270 while (w) | |
2271 { | |
2272 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2273 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2274 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2275 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2276 else | |
2277 { | |
2278 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2279 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2280 W. */ | |
2281 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2282 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2283 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2284 } | |
2285 | |
2286 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2287 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2288 } | |
2289 } | |
2290 | |
2291 | |
2292 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2293 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2294 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2295 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2296 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2297 void |
25012 | 2298 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2299 { |
25012 | 2300 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2301 | |
2302 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2303 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2304 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2305 | |
2306 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2307 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2308 abort (); | |
2309 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2310 abort (); | |
2311 } | |
2312 | |
2313 | |
2314 | |
2315 /********************************************************************** | |
2316 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2317 **********************************************************************/ | |
2318 | |
2319 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2320 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2321 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2322 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2323 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2324 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2325 window matrices in this section. | |
2326 | |
2327 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2328 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2329 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2330 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2331 | |
2332 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2333 | desired | desired | | |
2334 | | | | |
2335 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2336 | current | | |
2337 | | | |
2338 +----------------------------------+ | |
2339 | |
2340 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2341 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2342 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2343 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2344 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2345 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2346 | |
2347 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2348 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2349 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2350 enabled. | |
2351 | |
2352 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2353 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2354 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2355 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2356 | |
2357 This problem is solved like this: | |
2358 | |
2359 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2360 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2361 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2362 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2363 automatically. | |
2364 | |
2365 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2366 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2367 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2368 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2369 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2370 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2371 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2372 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2373 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2374 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2375 | |
2376 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2377 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2378 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2379 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2380 | |
2381 static void | |
2382 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2383 struct frame *f; | |
2384 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2385 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2386 |
25012 | 2387 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2388 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2389 | |
2390 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2391 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2392 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2393 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2394 | |
2395 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2396 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2397 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2398 } | |
2399 | |
2400 | |
2401 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2402 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2403 | |
2404 static void | |
2405 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2406 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2407 struct window *w; | |
2408 { | |
2409 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2410 { |
25012 | 2411 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2412 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2413 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2414 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2415 else | |
2416 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2417 | |
2418 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2419 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2420 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2421 |
25012 | 2422 |
2423 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2424 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2425 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2426 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2427 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2428 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2429 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2430 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2431 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2432 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2433 | |
2434 static void | |
2435 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2436 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2437 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2438 { |
25012 | 2439 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2440 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2441 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2442 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2443 | |
2444 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2445 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2446 { | |
2447 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2448 | |
2449 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2450 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2451 { | |
2452 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2453 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2454 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2455 : '|'); | |
2456 } | |
2457 } | |
2458 else | |
2459 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2460 | |
2461 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2462 frame matrix. */ | |
2463 window_y = 0; | |
2464 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2465 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2466 { |
25012 | 2467 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2468 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2469 int current_row_p = window_matrix == w->current_matrix; |
25012 | 2470 |
2471 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2472 window row. */ | |
2473 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2474 | |
2475 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2476 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2477 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2478 /* If only part of W's desired matrix has been built, and |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2479 window_row wasn't displayed, use the corresponding current |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2480 row instead. */ |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2481 if (window_matrix == w->desired_matrix |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2482 && !window_row->enabled_p) |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2483 { |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2484 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows + window_y; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2485 current_row_p = 1; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2486 } |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2487 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2488 if (current_row_p) |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2489 { |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2490 /* Copy window row to frame row. */ |
25012 | 2491 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], |
2492 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2493 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2494 } | |
2495 else | |
2496 { | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2497 xassert (window_row->enabled_p); |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2498 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2499 /* Only when a desired row has been displayed, we want |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2500 the corresponding frame row to be updated. */ |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2501 frame_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2502 |
25012 | 2503 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent |
2504 windows. */ | |
2505 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2506 { | |
2507 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2508 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2509 } | |
2510 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2511 #if 0 /* This shouldn't be necessary. Let's check it. */ |
25012 | 2512 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that |
2513 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2514 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2515 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2516 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2517 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2518 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2519 { |
25012 | 2520 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2521 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2522 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2523 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2524 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2525 | |
2526 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2527 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2528 | |
2529 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2530 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2531 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2532 #endif |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2533 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2534 /* Window row window_y must be a slice of frame row |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2535 frame_y. */ |
25012 | 2536 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2537 |
25012 | 2538 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because |
2539 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2540 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2541 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2542 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2543 #endif |
25012 | 2544 } |
2545 | |
2546 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2547 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2548 can be done simply. */ | |
2549 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2550 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2551 | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2552 /* Or in other flags. */ |
25012 | 2553 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; |
2554 | |
2555 /* Next row. */ | |
2556 ++window_y; | |
2557 ++frame_y; | |
2558 } | |
2559 } | |
2560 | |
2561 | |
2562 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2563 | |
2564 Each row has the form: | |
2565 | |
2566 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2567 | left | text | right | | |
2568 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2569 | |
2570 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2571 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2572 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2573 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2574 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2575 | |
2576 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2577 | |
2578 static void | |
2579 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2580 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2581 { | |
2582 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2583 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2584 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2585 } | |
2586 | |
2587 | |
2588 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2589 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2590 | |
2591 static void | |
2592 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2593 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2594 int area; | |
2595 { | |
2596 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2597 { | |
2598 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2599 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2600 | |
2601 while (text < end) | |
2602 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2603 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2604 } | |
2605 } | |
2606 | |
2607 | |
2608 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2609 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2610 | |
2611 static void | |
2612 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2613 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2614 int upto; | |
2615 { | |
2616 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2617 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2618 | |
2619 while (i < upto) | |
2620 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2621 | |
2622 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2623 } | |
2624 | |
2625 | |
2626 | |
2627 /********************************************************************** | |
2628 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2629 **********************************************************************/ | |
2630 | |
2631 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2632 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2633 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2634 | |
2635 static INLINE void | |
2636 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2637 struct frame *f; | |
2638 { | |
2639 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2640 } | |
2641 | |
2642 | |
2643 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2644 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2645 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2646 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2647 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2648 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2649 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2650 | |
2651 static INLINE void | |
2652 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2653 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2654 int row; | |
2655 { | |
2656 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2657 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
2658 int mouse_face_p = current_row->mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 2659 |
2660 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2661 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2662 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2663 | |
2664 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2665 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
2666 current_row->mouse_face_p = mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 2667 |
2668 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2669 for window matrices. */ | |
2670 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2671 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2672 } | |
2673 | |
2674 | |
2675 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2676 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2677 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2678 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2679 | |
2680 static void | |
2681 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2682 struct window *w; | |
2683 int frame_row; | |
2684 { | |
2685 while (w) | |
2686 { | |
2687 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2688 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2689 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2690 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2691 else | |
2692 { | |
2693 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2694 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2695 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2696 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2697 | |
2698 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2699 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2700 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2701 { |
25012 | 2702 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2703 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2704 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2705 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2706 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2707 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2708 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2709 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2710 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2711 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2712 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2713 } |
25012 | 2714 |
2715 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2716 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2717 } |
25012 | 2718 |
2719 | |
2720 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2721 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2722 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2723 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2724 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2725 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2726 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2727 | |
2728 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2729 | |
2730 void | |
2731 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2732 retained_p) | |
2733 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2734 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2735 int *copy_from; | |
2736 char *retained_p; | |
2737 { | |
2738 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2739 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2740 | |
2741 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2742 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2743 | |
2744 int i; | |
2745 | |
2746 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2747 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2748 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2749 | |
2750 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2751 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2752 { | |
2753 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2754 | |
2755 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2756 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2757 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2758 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2759 | |
2760 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2761 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2762 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2763 } | |
2764 | |
2765 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2766 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2767 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2768 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2769 } | |
2770 | |
2771 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2772 /* Synchronize glyph pointers in the current matrix of window W with |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2773 the current frame matrix. W must be full-width, and be on a tty |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2774 frame. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2775 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2776 static void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2777 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2778 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2779 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2780 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2781 struct glyph_row *window_row, *window_row_end, *frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2782 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2783 /* Preconditions: W must be a leaf window and full-width. Its frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2784 must have a frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2785 xassert (NILP (w->hchild) && NILP (w->vchild)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2786 xassert (WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2787 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2788 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2789 /* If W is a full-width window, glyph pointers in W's current matrix |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2790 have, by definition, to be the same as glyph pointers in the |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2791 corresponding frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2792 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2793 window_row_end = window_row + w->current_matrix->nrows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2794 frame_row = f->current_matrix->rows + XFASTINT (w->top); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2795 while (window_row < window_row_end) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2796 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2797 int area; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2798 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2799 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area <= LAST_AREA; ++area) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2800 window_row->glyphs[area] = frame_row->glyphs[area]; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2801 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2802 ++window_row, ++frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2803 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2804 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2805 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2806 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2807 /* Return the window in the window tree rooted in W containing frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2808 row ROW. Value is null if none is found. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2809 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2810 struct window * |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2811 frame_row_to_window (w, row) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2812 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2813 int row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2814 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2815 struct window *found = NULL; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2816 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2817 while (w && !found) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2818 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2819 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2820 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->hchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2821 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2822 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->vchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2823 else if (row >= XFASTINT (w->top) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2824 && row < XFASTINT (w->top) + XFASTINT (w->height)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2825 found = w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2826 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2827 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2828 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2829 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2830 return found; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2831 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2832 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2833 |
25012 | 2834 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after |
2835 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2836 | |
2837 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2838 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2839 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2840 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2841 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2842 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2843 which is empty. */ | |
2844 | |
2845 static void | |
2846 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2847 struct window *w; | |
2848 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2849 int *copy_from; | |
2850 char *retained_p; | |
2851 { | |
2852 while (w) | |
2853 { | |
2854 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2855 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2856 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2857 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2858 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2859 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2860 else | |
2861 { | |
2862 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2863 matrix m. */ | |
2864 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2865 int i, sync_p = 0; |
25012 | 2866 struct glyph_row *old_rows; |
2867 | |
2868 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2869 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2870 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2871 | |
2872 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2873 { | |
2874 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2875 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2876 | |
2877 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2878 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2879 | |
2880 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2881 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2882 | |
2883 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2884 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2885 | |
2886 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2887 int from_inside_window_p | |
2888 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2889 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2890 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2891 int to_inside_window_p |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2892 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2893 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2894 if (from_inside_window_p && to_inside_window_p) |
25012 | 2895 { |
2896 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2897 int enabled_before_p; | |
2898 | |
2899 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2900 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2901 that. */ | |
2902 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2903 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2904 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2905 | |
2906 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2907 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2908 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2909 } | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2910 else if (to_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2911 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2912 /* A copy between windows. This is an infrequent |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2913 case not worth optimizing. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2914 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2915 struct window *root = XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2916 struct window *w2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2917 struct glyph_matrix *m2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2918 int m2_from; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2919 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2920 w2 = frame_row_to_window (root, frame_to); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2921 m2 = w2->current_matrix; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2922 m2_from = frame_from - m2->matrix_y; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2923 copy_row_except_pointers (m->rows + window_to, |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2924 m2->rows + m2_from); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2925 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2926 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2927 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2928 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2929 sync_p = 1; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2930 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2931 else if (from_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2932 sync_p = 1; |
25012 | 2933 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2934 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2935 /* If there was a copy between windows, make sure glyph |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2936 pointers are in sync with the frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2937 if (sync_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2938 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w); |
25012 | 2939 |
2940 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2941 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2942 } | |
2943 | |
2944 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2945 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2946 } | |
2947 } | |
2948 | |
2949 | |
2950 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2951 | |
2952 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2953 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2954 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2955 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2956 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2957 |
21514 | 2958 void |
25012 | 2959 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2960 struct window *w; |
2961 { | |
25012 | 2962 while (w) |
2963 { | |
2964 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2965 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2966 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2967 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2968 else | |
2969 { | |
2970 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2971 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2972 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2973 } | |
2974 | |
2975 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2976 } | |
2977 } | |
2978 | |
2979 | |
2980 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2981 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2982 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2983 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2984 | |
2985 static void | |
2986 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2987 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2988 { | |
2989 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2990 int i = 0; | |
2991 | |
2992 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2993 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2994 | |
2995 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2996 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2997 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2998 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2999 { | |
3000 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
3001 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
3002 abort (); | |
3003 ++i, ++j; | |
3004 } | |
3005 } | |
3006 | |
3007 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
3008 | |
3009 | |
3010 | |
3011 /********************************************************************** | |
3012 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
3013 **********************************************************************/ | |
3014 | |
3015 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3016 | |
3017 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
3018 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
3019 | |
3020 static int | |
3021 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
3022 struct window *w; | |
3023 int vpos; | |
3024 { | |
3025 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3026 | |
3027 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3028 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
3029 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
3030 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
3031 return vpos; | |
3032 } | |
3033 | |
3034 | |
3035 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
3036 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
3037 | |
3038 static int | |
3039 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
3040 struct window *w; | |
3041 int hpos; | |
3042 { | |
3043 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3044 | |
3045 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3046 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
3047 return hpos; | |
314 | 3048 } |
25012 | 3049 |
3050 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
3051 | |
3052 | |
314 | 3053 |
25012 | 3054 /********************************************************************** |
3055 Redrawing Frames | |
3056 **********************************************************************/ | |
3057 | |
3058 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
3059 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
3060 (frame) | |
3061 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3062 { | |
3063 struct frame *f; | |
3064 | |
3065 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
3066 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
3067 | |
3068 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
3069 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
3070 called so early here). */ | |
3071 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
3072 return Qnil; | |
3073 | |
3074 update_begin (f); | |
3075 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
3076 set_terminal_modes (); | |
3077 clear_frame (); | |
3078 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
3079 update_end (f); | |
3080 fflush (stdout); | |
3081 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
3082 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
3083 its redisplay done. */ | |
3084 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
3085 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
3086 f->garbaged = 0; | |
3087 return Qnil; | |
3088 } | |
3089 | |
3090 | |
3091 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
3092 function redraw-frame. */ | |
3093 | |
3094 void | |
3095 redraw_frame (f) | |
3096 struct frame *f; | |
3097 { | |
3098 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3099 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
3100 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3101 } | |
3102 | |
3103 | |
3104 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
3105 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
3106 () | |
3107 { | |
3108 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3109 | |
3110 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3111 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3112 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3113 | |
3114 return Qnil; | |
3115 } | |
3116 | |
3117 | |
3118 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
3119 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
3120 | |
3121 void | |
3122 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
3123 { | |
3124 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3125 | |
3126 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3127 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
3128 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3129 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3130 } | |
3131 | |
3132 | |
3133 | |
3134 /*********************************************************************** | |
3135 Direct Operations | |
3136 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3137 | |
3138 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
3139 | |
3140 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
3141 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
3142 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
3143 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
3144 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
3145 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
3146 | |
3147 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
3148 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
3149 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
3150 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 3151 |
3152 int | |
3153 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3154 int g; | |
3155 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3156 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3157 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3158 struct it it, it2; | |
3159 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3160 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3161 int n; | |
3162 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3163 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3164 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3165 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3166 int added_width; | |
3167 struct text_pos pos; | |
3168 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3169 | |
3170 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3171 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3172 | |
3173 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3174 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3175 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3176 || fonts_changed_p | |
3177 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3178 || face_change_count | |
3179 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3180 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3181 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3182 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3183 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3184 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3185 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3186 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3187 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3188 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3189 || (overwrite_p | |
3190 && PT != ZV | |
3191 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3192 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3193 || g == '\t' | |
3194 || g == '\n' | |
3195 || g == '\r' | |
3196 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3197 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3198 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3199 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3200 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3201 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3202 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3203 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3204 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3205 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3206 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3207 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3208 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3209 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3210 return 0; | |
3211 | |
3212 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3213 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3214 position. */ | |
3215 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3216 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
28361
eccb57c44da5
(direct_output_for_insert): Use DEC_TEXT_POS
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27968
diff
changeset
|
3217 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos, !NILP (current_buffer->enable_multibyte_characters)); |
25012 | 3218 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, |
3219 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3220 | |
3221 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3222 if (glyph_row->mouse_face_p) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3223 return 0; |
25012 | 3224 |
3225 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3226 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3227 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3228 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3229 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3230 { | |
3231 struct glyph *last; | |
3232 | |
3233 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3234 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3235 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
3236 && last->u.ch == ' ')) |
25012 | 3237 return 0; |
3238 } | |
3239 | |
3240 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3241 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3242 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3243 return 0; | |
3244 | |
3245 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3246 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3247 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3248 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3249 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3250 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3251 | |
3252 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3253 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3254 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3255 combination of both. */ | |
3256 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3257 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3258 { | |
3259 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3260 | |
3261 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3262 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3263 return 0; | |
3264 | |
3265 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3266 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3267 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3268 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3269 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3270 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3271 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3272 return 0; | |
3273 | |
3274 delta += 1; | |
3275 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
32468
20788c8274cd
(direct_output_for_insert): Call set_iterator_to_next
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31932
diff
changeset
|
3276 set_iterator_to_next (&it, 1); |
25012 | 3277 } |
3278 | |
3279 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3280 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3281 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3282 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3283 return 0; |
3284 | |
25012 | 3285 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3286 it2 = it; | |
3287 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3288 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3289 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3290 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3291 { | |
3292 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3293 return 0; | |
32468
20788c8274cd
(direct_output_for_insert): Call set_iterator_to_next
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31932
diff
changeset
|
3294 set_iterator_to_next (&it2, 1); |
25012 | 3295 } |
3296 | |
3297 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3298 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3299 | |
3300 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3301 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3302 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3303 | |
3304 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3305 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3306 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3307 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3308 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3309 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3310 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3311 | |
3312 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3313 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3314 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3315 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3316 while (glyph < end) | |
3317 { | |
3318 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3319 ++glyph; | |
3320 } | |
3321 | |
3322 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3323 inserted ones. */ | |
3324 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
26546
0f43cc91d6a5
(direct_output_for_insert): Increment glyph positions
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26499
diff
changeset
|
3325 if (glyph->charpos > 0 && BUFFERP (glyph->object)) |
25012 | 3326 glyph->charpos += delta; |
3327 | |
3328 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3329 { | |
3330 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3331 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3332 } | |
3333 | |
3334 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3335 increment_matrix_positions (w->current_matrix, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3336 w->cursor.vpos + 1, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3337 w->current_matrix->nrows, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3338 delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 3339 |
3340 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3341 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3342 | |
26591
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3343 glyph_row->displays_text_p = 1; |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3344 w->window_end_vpos = make_number (max (w->cursor.vpos, |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3345 XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos))); |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3346 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3347 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3348 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3349 | |
3350 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3351 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3352 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3353 and updated_row. */ | |
3354 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3355 update_begin (f); | |
3356 if (rif) | |
3357 { | |
3358 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3359 | |
3360 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3361 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3362 else | |
3363 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3364 } | |
3365 else | |
3366 { | |
3367 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3368 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3369 else | |
3370 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3371 } | |
3372 | |
3373 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3374 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3375 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3376 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3377 | |
3378 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3379 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3380 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3381 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3382 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3383 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3384 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3385 else | |
3386 { | |
3387 int x, y; | |
3388 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3389 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3390 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3391 : 0)); | |
3392 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3393 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3394 } | |
3395 | |
3396 if (rif) | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3397 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1, 0); |
25012 | 3398 update_end (f); |
3399 updated_row = NULL; | |
3400 fflush (stdout); | |
3401 | |
3402 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3403 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3404 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3405 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3406 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3407 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3408 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3409 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3410 |
25012 | 3411 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3412 return 1; |
3413 } | |
3414 | |
25012 | 3415 |
3416 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3417 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3418 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3419 | |
314 | 3420 int |
3421 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3422 int n; | |
3423 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3424 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3425 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3426 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3427 | |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3428 /* Give up if point moved out of or into a composition. */ |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
3429 if (check_point_in_composition (current_buffer, XINT (w->last_point), |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3430 current_buffer, PT)) |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3431 return 0; |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3432 |
25012 | 3433 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ |
3434 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3435 return 0; |
25012 | 3436 |
3437 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3438 displaying a message. */ | |
3439 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3440 return 0; | |
3441 | |
3442 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3443 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3444 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3445 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3446 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3447 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3448 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3449 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3450 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3451 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3452 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3453 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3454 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3455 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3456 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3457 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3458 |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3459 /* Give up if currently displaying a message instead of the |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3460 minibuffer contents. */ |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3461 if (XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3462 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window)) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3463 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3464 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3465 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3466 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3467 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3468 |
25012 | 3469 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3470 | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
3471 /* Give up if PT is outside of the last known cursor row. */ |
25012 | 3472 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) |
3473 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3474 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3475 |
25012 | 3476 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
3477 |
25012 | 3478 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3479 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3480 |
3481 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3482 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3483 | |
3484 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3485 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3486 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3487 else | |
3488 { | |
3489 int x, y; | |
3490 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3491 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3492 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3493 : 0)); | |
3494 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3495 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3496 } | |
3497 | |
314 | 3498 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3499 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3500 return 1; |
3501 } | |
25012 | 3502 |
3503 | |
314 | 3504 |
25012 | 3505 /*********************************************************************** |
3506 Frame Update | |
3507 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3508 | |
3509 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3510 | |
3511 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3512 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3513 scrolling. | |
3514 | |
3515 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3516 |
3517 int | |
25012 | 3518 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3519 struct frame *f; | |
3520 int force_p; | |
3521 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3522 { | |
3523 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3524 int paused_p; | |
3525 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3526 | |
3527 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3528 { | |
3529 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3530 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3531 | |
3532 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3533 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3534 | |
3535 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3536 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3537 update_begin (f); | |
3538 | |
3539 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3540 support. */ | |
3541 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3542 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3543 | |
3544 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3545 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3546 { |
3547 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3548 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3549 |
3550 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3551 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3552 { | |
3553 update_window (w, 1); | |
3554 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3555 | |
3556 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3557 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3558 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3559 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3560 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
25012 | 3561 } |
3562 } | |
3563 | |
3564 | |
3565 /* Update windows. */ | |
3566 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3567 update_end (f); | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3568 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3569 #if 0 /* This flush is a performance bottleneck under X, |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3570 and it doesn't seem to be necessary anyway. */ |
25012 | 3571 rif->flush_display (f); |
3572 #endif | |
3573 } | |
3574 else | |
3575 { | |
3576 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3577 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3578 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3579 | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3580 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. */ |
25012 | 3581 build_frame_matrix (f); |
3582 | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3583 /* Update the display */ |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3584 update_begin (f); |
25012 | 3585 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3586 update_end (f); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3587 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3588 if (termscript) |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3589 fflush (termscript); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3590 fflush (stdout); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3591 |
25012 | 3592 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ |
3593 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3594 } | |
3595 | |
3596 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3597 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3598 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3599 display_completed = !paused_p; |
25012 | 3600 return paused_p; |
3601 } | |
3602 | |
3603 | |
3604 | |
3605 /************************************************************************ | |
3606 Window-based updates | |
3607 ************************************************************************/ | |
3608 | |
3609 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3610 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3611 | |
3612 static int | |
3613 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3614 struct window *w; | |
3615 int force_p; | |
3616 { | |
3617 int paused_p = 0; | |
3618 | |
3619 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3620 { | |
3621 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3622 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3623 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3624 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3625 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3626 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3627 | |
3628 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3629 } | |
3630 | |
3631 return paused_p; | |
3632 } | |
3633 | |
3634 | |
3635 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3636 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3637 | |
3638 void | |
3639 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3640 struct window *w; | |
3641 int force_p; | |
3642 { | |
3643 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3644 { | |
3645 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3646 | |
3647 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3648 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3649 | |
3650 /* Update W. */ | |
3651 update_begin (f); | |
3652 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3653 update_end (f); | |
3654 | |
3655 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3656 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3657 } | |
3658 } | |
3659 | |
3660 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3661 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3662 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3663 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3664 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3665 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3666 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3667 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3668 { |
30165
d7ec5b3caccc
(redraw_overlapped_rows): Add missing local.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30161
diff
changeset
|
3669 int i; |
d7ec5b3caccc
(redraw_overlapped_rows): Add missing local.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30161
diff
changeset
|
3670 |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3671 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3672 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3673 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3674 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3675 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3676 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 { |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3678 struct glyph_row *row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3679 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3681 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3682 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3683 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3684 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3685 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3686 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3687 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3688 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3689 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3690 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3692 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3693 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3694 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3695 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3696 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3697 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3698 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3699 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3700 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3702 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3703 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3704 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3705 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3706 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3707 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3708 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3709 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3710 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3711 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3712 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3713 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3714 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3715 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3716 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3717 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3718 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3719 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3720 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3721 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3722 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3723 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3724 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3725 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3726 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3727 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3728 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3729 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3730 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3731 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3732 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3733 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3734 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3735 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3736 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3737 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3738 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3739 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3740 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3741 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3742 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3743 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3744 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3745 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3746 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3747 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3748 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3749 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3750 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3751 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3752 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3753 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3754 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3755 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3756 |
25012 | 3757 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3758 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3759 | |
3760 static int | |
3761 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3762 struct window *w; | |
3763 int force_p; | |
3764 { | |
3765 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3766 int paused_p; | |
3767 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3768 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3769 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3770 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3771 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3772 #endif |
25012 | 3773 |
3774 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3775 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3776 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3777 | |
3778 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3779 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3780 force_p = 1; | |
3781 else | |
3782 detect_input_pending (); | |
3783 | |
3784 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3785 the update. */ | |
3786 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3787 { | |
3788 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3789 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3790 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3791 int yb, changed_p = 0, mouse_face_overwritten_p = 0; |
25012 | 3792 |
3793 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3794 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3795 | |
3796 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3797 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3798 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3799 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3800 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3801 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3802 |
3803 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3804 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3805 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3806 { | |
3807 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3808 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3809 desired_matrix), |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3810 &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3811 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3812 } |
3813 | |
3814 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3815 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3816 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3817 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3818 ++row; | |
3819 | |
31825
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
3820 /* Try reusing part of the display by copying. */ |
25012 | 3821 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) |
3822 { | |
25546 | 3823 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3824 if (rc < 0) |
3825 { | |
3826 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3827 paused_p = 0; | |
3828 goto set_cursor; | |
3829 } | |
3830 else if (rc > 0) | |
3831 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3832 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3833 } |
3834 | |
3835 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3836 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3837 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3838 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3839 { |
25546 | 3840 header_line_row->y = 0; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3841 update_window_line (w, 0, &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3842 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3843 } |
3844 | |
3845 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3846 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
31653
2554afbeb88d
(update_window): Make sure to make desired rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31295
diff
changeset
|
3847 if (row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3848 { |
3849 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3850 int i; | |
3851 | |
3852 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3853 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3854 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3855 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3856 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3857 detect_input_pending (); | |
3858 | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3859 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos, |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3860 &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25012 | 3861 |
3862 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3863 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3864 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3865 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3866 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3867 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3868 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3869 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3870 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3871 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3872 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3873 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3874 } | |
3875 | |
3876 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3877 paused_p = row < end; | |
3878 | |
3879 set_cursor: | |
3880 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3881 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
25012 | 3882 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3883 { | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3884 if (changed_p && rif->fix_overlapping_area) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3885 { |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3886 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3887 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3888 } |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3889 |
25012 | 3890 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ |
3891 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3892 | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3893 #if 0 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This is |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3894 for debugging only. See the comment of check_matrix_invariants. */ |
25012 | 3895 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); |
3896 #endif | |
3897 } | |
3898 | |
3899 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3900 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3901 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3902 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3903 |
25012 | 3904 /* End of update of window W. */ |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3905 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1, mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25012 | 3906 } |
3907 else | |
3908 paused_p = 1; | |
3909 | |
3910 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3911 |
25012 | 3912 return paused_p; |
3913 } | |
3914 | |
3915 | |
3916 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3917 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3918 | |
3919 static void | |
3920 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3921 struct window *w; | |
3922 int area, vpos; | |
3923 { | |
3924 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3925 | |
3926 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3927 will be relative to. */ | |
3928 updated_area = area; | |
3929 | |
3930 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3931 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3932 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3933 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3934 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3935 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3936 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3937 } | |
3938 | |
3939 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3940 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3941 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3942 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3943 static int |
25012 | 3944 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3945 struct window *w; | |
3946 int vpos; | |
314 | 3947 { |
25012 | 3948 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3949 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3950 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3951 |
3952 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3953 will be relative to. */ | |
3954 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3955 | |
3956 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3957 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3958 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3959 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3960 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3961 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3962 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3963 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3964 || current_row->overlapped_p |
30307
faf4e303bab7
(update_text_area): Write the whole row if it
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30165
diff
changeset
|
3965 || current_row->mouse_face_p |
25012 | 3966 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3967 { | |
3968 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3969 | |
3970 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3971 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3972 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3973 | |
3974 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3975 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3976 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3977 } |
3978 else | |
3979 { | |
3980 int stop, i, x; | |
3981 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3982 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
33596
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
3983 int overlapping_glyphs_p = current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; |
25012 | 3984 |
3985 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3986 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3987 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3988 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3989 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3990 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3991 | |
3992 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3993 i = 0; | |
3994 x = desired_row->x; | |
3995 | |
3996 while (i < stop) | |
3997 { | |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
3998 int can_skip_p = 1; |
33596
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
3999 |
25012 | 4000 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These |
33596
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4001 don't have to be written. We can't skip if the last |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4002 current glyph overlaps the glyph to its right. For |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4003 example, consider a current row of `if ' with the `f' in |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4004 Courier bold so that it overlaps the ` ' to its right. |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4005 If the desired row is ` ', we would skip over the space |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4006 after the `if' and there would remain a pixel from the |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4007 `f' on the screen. */ |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4008 if (overlapping_glyphs_p && i > 0) |
25012 | 4009 { |
33596
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4010 struct glyph *glyph = ¤t_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][i - 1]; |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4011 int left, right; |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4012 |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4013 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), |
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4014 &left, &right); |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4015 can_skip_p = right == 0; |
25012 | 4016 } |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4017 |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4018 if (can_skip_p) |
25012 | 4019 { |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4020 while (i < stop |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4021 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4022 { |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4023 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4024 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4025 } |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4026 |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4027 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4028 ppp ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4029 is "xxx ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4030 has not. The loop above will stop in front of the |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4031 first `p' in the current row. If we would start |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4032 writing glyphs there, we wouldn't erase the lbearing |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4033 of the `p'. The rest of the lbearing problem is then |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4034 taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4035 if (overlapping_glyphs_p |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4036 && i > 0 |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4037 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4038 && (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4039 != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA])) |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4040 { |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4041 int left, right; |
33596
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4042 |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4043 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4044 &left, &right); |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4045 while (left > 0 && i > 0) |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4046 { |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4047 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4048 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4049 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4050 } |
25012 | 4051 } |
4052 } | |
4053 | |
4054 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
4055 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
4056 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
4057 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
4058 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4059 { | |
4060 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
4061 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
4062 int current_x = x; | |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4063 int skip_first_p = !can_skip_p; |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4064 |
25012 | 4065 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ |
4066 while (i < stop | |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4067 && (skip_first_p |
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4068 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) |
25012 | 4069 && x == current_x) |
4070 { | |
4071 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4072 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4073 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
33603
6697403d3c12
(update_text_area): Fix last change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33596
diff
changeset
|
4074 skip_first_p = 0; |
25012 | 4075 } |
4076 | |
4077 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
4078 { | |
4079 i = start_hpos; | |
4080 x = start_x; | |
4081 desired_glyph = start; | |
4082 break; | |
4083 } | |
33596
680ddd4ab1f9
(update_text_area): Don't skip over equal glyphs
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33527
diff
changeset
|
4084 |
25012 | 4085 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); |
4086 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4087 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4088 } |
4089 } | |
4090 | |
4091 /* Write the rest. */ | |
4092 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4093 { | |
4094 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
4095 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4096 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4097 } |
4098 | |
4099 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
4100 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
4101 { | |
4102 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
4103 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
4104 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
4105 appropriately above. */ | |
4106 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
4107 } | |
4108 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
4109 { | |
4110 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
4111 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4112 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4113 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4114 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4115 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4116 } |
4117 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
4118 { | |
4119 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
4120 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
4121 int x; | |
4122 | |
4123 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4124 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4125 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4126 | |
4127 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
4128 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
4129 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
4130 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
4131 this way. */ | |
4132 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
4133 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4134 { | |
4135 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
4136 x = -1; | |
4137 } | |
4138 else | |
4139 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
4140 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4141 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4142 } |
4143 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4144 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4145 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4146 } |
4147 | |
4148 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4149 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4150 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4151 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4152 static int |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4153 update_window_line (w, vpos, mouse_face_overwritten_p) |
25012 | 4154 struct window *w; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4155 int vpos, *mouse_face_overwritten_p; |
25012 | 4156 { |
4157 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4158 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4159 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 4160 |
4161 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
4162 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
4163 updated_row = desired_row; | |
4164 | |
31690
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4165 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired matrix was |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4166 built with a vscroll and then make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4167 the matrix. Make sure to make such rows current anyway, since |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4168 we need the correct y-position, for example, in the current matrix. */ |
31726
59b455472b56
(update_window_line): Make sure to always draw
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31690
diff
changeset
|
4169 if (desired_row->mode_line_p |
59b455472b56
(update_window_line): Make sure to always draw
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31690
diff
changeset
|
4170 || desired_row->visible_height > 0) |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4171 { |
31690
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4172 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4173 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4174 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4175 if (!desired_row->full_width_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4176 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4177 { |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4178 changed_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4179 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4180 } |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4181 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4182 /* Update the display of the text area. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4183 if (update_text_area (w, vpos)) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4184 { |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4185 changed_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4186 if (current_row->mouse_face_p) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4187 *mouse_face_overwritten_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4188 } |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4189 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4190 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4191 if (!desired_row->full_width_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4192 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4193 { |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4194 changed_p = 1; |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4195 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4196 } |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4197 |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4198 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4199 if (!current_row->enabled_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4200 || desired_row->y != current_row->y |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4201 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4202 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4203 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4204 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4205 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4206 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4207 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4208 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4209 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4210 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) |
6abff42174ea
(update_window): Move test for invisible lines
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31653
diff
changeset
|
4211 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4212 } |
25012 | 4213 |
4214 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4215 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4216 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4217 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4218 } |
4219 | |
4220 | |
4221 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4222 be called from update_window. */ | |
4223 | |
4224 static void | |
4225 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4226 struct window *w; | |
4227 { | |
4228 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4229 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4230 | |
4231 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4232 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4233 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4234 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4235 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4236 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4237 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4238 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4239 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4240 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4241 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4242 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4243 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4244 { | |
4245 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4246 | |
4247 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4248 { | |
4249 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4250 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4251 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4252 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4253 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4254 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4255 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4256 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4257 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4258 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4259 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4260 ++row) |
25012 | 4261 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4262 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4263 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4264 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4265 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4266 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4267 break; |
25012 | 4268 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4269 |
25012 | 4270 if (last_row) |
4271 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4272 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4273 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4274 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4275 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4276 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4277 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4278 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4279 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4280 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4281 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4282 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4283 |
25012 | 4284 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4285 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4286 } |
4287 } | |
4288 } | |
4289 else | |
4290 { | |
4291 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4292 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4293 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4294 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4295 } | |
4296 | |
4297 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4298 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4299 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4300 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4301 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4302 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4303 } | |
4304 | |
4305 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4306 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p to ON_P for all windows in the window |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4307 tree rooted at W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4308 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4309 void |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4310 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4311 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4312 int on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4313 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4314 while (w) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4315 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4316 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4317 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4318 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4319 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4320 else |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4321 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4322 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4323 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4324 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4325 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4326 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4327 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4328 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4329 /*********************************************************************** |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4330 Window-Based Scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4331 ***********************************************************************/ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4332 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4333 /* Structure describing rows in scrolling_window. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4334 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4335 struct row_entry |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4336 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4337 /* Number of occurrences of this row in desired and current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4338 int old_uses, new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4339 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4340 /* Vpos of row in new matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4341 int new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4342 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4343 /* Bucket index of this row_entry in the hash table row_table. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4344 int bucket; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4345 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4346 /* The row described by this entry. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4347 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4348 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4349 /* Hash collision chain. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4350 struct row_entry *next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4351 }; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4352 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4353 /* A pool to allocate row_entry structures from, and the size of the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4354 pool. The pool is reallocated in scrolling_window when we find |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4355 that we need a larger one. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4356 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4357 static struct row_entry *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4358 static int row_entry_pool_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4359 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4360 /* Index of next free entry in row_entry_pool. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4361 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4362 static int row_entry_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4363 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4364 /* The hash table used during scrolling, and the table's size. This |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4365 table is used to quickly identify equal rows in the desired and |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4366 current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4367 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4368 static struct row_entry **row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4369 static int row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4370 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4371 /* Vectors of pointers to row_entry structures belonging to the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4372 current and desired matrix, and the size of the vectors. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4373 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4374 static struct row_entry **old_lines, **new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4375 static int old_lines_size, new_lines_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4376 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4377 /* A pool to allocate run structures from, and its size. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4378 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4379 static struct run *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4380 static int runs_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4381 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4382 /* A vector of runs of lines found during scrolling. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4383 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4384 static struct run **runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4385 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4386 static struct row_entry *add_row_entry P_ ((struct window *, |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4387 struct glyph_row *)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4388 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4389 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4390 /* Add glyph row ROW to the scrolling hash table during the scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4391 of window W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4392 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4393 static INLINE struct row_entry * |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4394 add_row_entry (w, row) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4395 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4396 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4397 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4398 struct row_entry *entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4399 int i = row->hash % row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4400 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4401 entry = row_table[i]; |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4402 while (entry && !row_equal_p (w, entry->row, row, 1)) |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4403 entry = entry->next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4404 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4405 if (entry == NULL) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4406 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4407 entry = row_entry_pool + row_entry_idx++; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4408 entry->row = row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4409 entry->old_uses = entry->new_uses = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4410 entry->new_line_number = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4411 entry->bucket = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4412 entry->next = row_table[i]; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4413 row_table[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4414 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4415 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4416 return entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4417 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4418 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4419 |
25012 | 4420 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. |
25546 | 4421 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4422 |
4423 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4424 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4425 O(N) time. | |
4426 | |
4427 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4428 | |
4429 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4430 | |
4431 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4432 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4433 | |
4434 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4435 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4436 | |
4437 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4438 forward and backward. | |
4439 | |
4440 Value is | |
4441 | |
4442 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4443 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4444 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4445 | |
4446 static int | |
25546 | 4447 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4448 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4449 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4450 { |
4451 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4452 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4453 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4454 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4455 int nruns, nbytes, n, run_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4456 struct row_entry *entry; |
25012 | 4457 |
4458 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
31825
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4459 for (i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; i < current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) |
25012 | 4460 { |
31825
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4461 struct glyph_row *d = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i); |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4462 struct glyph_row *c = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i); |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4463 |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4464 if (c->enabled_p |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4465 && d->enabled_p |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4466 && c->y == d->y |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4467 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (c) <= yb |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4468 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (d) <= yb |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4469 && row_equal_p (w, c, d, 1)) |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4470 { |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4471 assign_row (c, d); |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4472 d->enabled_p = 0; |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4473 } |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4474 else |
62830644b967
(scrolling_window): Compare y-positions of rows
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31726
diff
changeset
|
4475 break; |
25012 | 4476 } |
4477 | |
4478 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4479 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4480 return -1; | |
4481 | |
4482 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4483 | |
4484 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4485 desired matrix. */ | |
4486 i = first_new + 1; | |
4487 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4488 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4489 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4490 ++i; |
4491 | |
4492 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4493 return 0; | |
4494 | |
4495 last_new = i; | |
4496 | |
4497 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4498 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4499 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4500 disabled. */ | |
4501 i = first_old + 1; | |
4502 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4503 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4504 ++i; |
4505 last_old = i; | |
4506 | |
4507 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4508 i = last_new; | |
4509 j = last_old; | |
4510 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4511 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4512 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4513 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4514 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4515 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4516 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4517 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1), 1)) |
25012 | 4518 --i, --j; |
4519 last_new = i; | |
4520 last_old = j; | |
4521 | |
4522 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4523 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4524 return 0; | |
4525 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4526 /* Reallocate vectors, tables etc. if necessary. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4527 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4528 if (current_matrix->nrows > old_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4529 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4530 old_lines_size = current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4531 nbytes = old_lines_size * sizeof *old_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4532 old_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (old_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4533 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4534 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4535 if (desired_matrix->nrows > new_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4536 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4537 new_lines_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4538 nbytes = new_lines_size * sizeof *new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4539 new_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (new_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4540 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4541 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4542 n = desired_matrix->nrows + current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4543 if (3 * n > row_table_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4544 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4545 row_table_size = next_almost_prime (3 * n); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4546 nbytes = row_table_size * sizeof *row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4547 row_table = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4548 bzero (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4549 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4550 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4551 if (n > row_entry_pool_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4552 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4553 row_entry_pool_size = n; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4554 nbytes = row_entry_pool_size * sizeof *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4555 row_entry_pool = (struct row_entry *) xrealloc (row_entry_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4556 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4557 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4558 if (desired_matrix->nrows > runs_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4559 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4560 runs_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4561 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4562 runs = (struct run **) xrealloc (runs, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4563 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4564 run_pool = (struct run *) xrealloc (run_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4565 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4566 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4567 nruns = run_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4568 row_entry_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4569 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4570 /* Add rows from the current and desired matrix to the hash table |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4571 row_hash_table to be able to find equal ones quickly. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4572 |
25012 | 4573 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) |
4574 { | |
4575 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4576 { | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4577 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4578 old_lines[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4579 ++entry->old_uses; |
25012 | 4580 } |
4581 else | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4582 old_lines[i] = NULL; |
25012 | 4583 } |
4584 | |
4585 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4586 { | |
4587 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4588 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4589 ++entry->new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4590 entry->new_line_number = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4591 new_lines[i] = entry; |
25012 | 4592 } |
4593 | |
4594 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4595 in both matrices. */ | |
4596 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4597 if (old_lines[i] |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4598 && old_lines[i]->old_uses == 1 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4599 && old_lines[i]->new_uses == 1) |
25012 | 4600 { |
4601 int j, k; | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4602 int new_line = old_lines[i]->new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4603 struct run *run = run_pool + run_idx++; |
25012 | 4604 |
4605 /* Record move. */ | |
4606 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4607 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4608 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4609 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4610 run->nrows = 1; | |
4611 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4612 | |
4613 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4614 j = i - 1; | |
4615 k = new_line - 1; | |
4616 while (j > first_old | |
4617 && k > first_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4618 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4619 { |
4620 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4621 --run->current_vpos; | |
4622 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4623 ++run->nrows; | |
4624 run->height += h; | |
4625 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4626 run->current_y -= h; | |
4627 --j, --k; | |
4628 } | |
4629 | |
4630 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4631 j = i + 1; | |
4632 k = new_line + 1; | |
4633 while (j < last_old | |
4634 && k < last_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4635 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4636 { |
4637 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4638 ++run->nrows; | |
4639 run->height += h; | |
4640 ++j, ++k; | |
4641 } | |
4642 | |
4643 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4644 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4645 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4646 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4647 case. */ | |
4648 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4649 ; | |
34203
e55480843a8e
(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33763
diff
changeset
|
4650 for (k = nruns; k > j; --k) |
25012 | 4651 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; |
4652 runs[j] = run; | |
4653 ++nruns; | |
4654 | |
4655 i += run->nrows; | |
4656 } | |
4657 else | |
4658 ++i; | |
4659 | |
4660 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4661 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4662 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4663 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4664 | |
4665 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4666 | A | | B | | |
4667 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4668 | B | | A | | |
4669 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4670 | |
4671 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4672 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4673 | |
4674 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4675 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4676 { | |
4677 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4678 | |
4679 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4680 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4681 { | |
4682 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4683 | |
4684 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4685 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4686 { | |
4687 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4688 | |
4689 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4690 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4691 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4692 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4693 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4694 p->nrows = 0; | |
4695 } | |
4696 } | |
4697 | |
4698 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4699 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4700 { | |
4701 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4702 int to_overlapped_p; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4703 |
25012 | 4704 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4705 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4706 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4707 assign_row (to, from); |
4708 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4709 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4710 } |
4711 } | |
4712 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4713 /* Clear the hash table, for the next time. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4714 for (i = 0; i < row_entry_idx; ++i) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4715 row_table[row_entry_pool[i].bucket] = NULL; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4716 |
25012 | 4717 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ |
4718 return 1; | |
4719 } | |
4720 | |
4721 | |
4722 | |
4723 /************************************************************************ | |
4724 Frame-Based Updates | |
4725 ************************************************************************/ | |
4726 | |
4727 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4728 | |
4729 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4730 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4731 should not be tried. | |
4732 | |
4733 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4734 | |
4735 static int | |
4736 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4737 struct frame *f; | |
4738 int force_p; | |
4739 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4740 { | |
4741 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4742 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4743 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4744 int i; | |
314 | 4745 int pause; |
4746 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4747 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4748 |
4749 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4750 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4751 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4752 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4753 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4754 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4755 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4756 |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4757 if (redisplay_dont_pause) |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4758 force_p = 1; |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4759 else if (!force_p && detect_input_pending ()) |
314 | 4760 { |
4761 pause = 1; | |
4762 goto do_pause; | |
4763 } | |
4764 | |
25012 | 4765 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4766 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4767 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4768 |
493 | 4769 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4770 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4771 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4772 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4773 break; |
4774 | |
4775 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4776 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4777 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4778 |
4779 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4780 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4781 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4782 | |
4783 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4784 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4785 { |
25012 | 4786 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4787 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4788 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4789 { |
4790 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4791 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4792 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4793 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4794 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4795 if (outq > 900 | |
4796 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4797 { | |
4798 fflush (stdout); | |
4799 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4800 { | |
554 | 4801 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4802 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4803 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4804 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4805 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4806 #endif | |
4807 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4808 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4809 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4810 } |
4811 } | |
4812 } | |
4813 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4814 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4815 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4816 |
25012 | 4817 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4818 } |
4819 } | |
25012 | 4820 |
764 | 4821 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4822 |
4823 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4824 if (!pause) | |
4825 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4826 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4827 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4828 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4829 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4830 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4831 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4832 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4833 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4834 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4835 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4836 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4837 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4838 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4839 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4840 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4841 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4842 { |
25012 | 4843 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4844 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4845 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4846 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4847 } |
708 | 4848 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4849 { |
25012 | 4850 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4851 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4852 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4853 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4854 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4855 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4856 { |
25012 | 4857 --row; |
4858 col = 0; | |
4859 | |
4860 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4861 { | |
4862 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4863 must be ignored here. */ | |
4864 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4865 row); | |
4866 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4867 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4868 | |
4869 while (last > start | |
4870 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4871 --last; | |
4872 | |
4873 col = last - start; | |
4874 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4875 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4876 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4877 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4878 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4879 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4880 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4881 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4882 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4883 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4884 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4885 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4886 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4887 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4888 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4889 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4890 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4891 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4892 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4893 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4894 } |
314 | 4895 else |
25012 | 4896 { |
4897 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4898 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4899 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
29687
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4900 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0 |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4901 /* The cursor vpos may be temporarily out of bounds |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4902 in the following situation: There is one window, |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4903 with the cursor in the lower half of it. The window |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4904 is split, and a message causes a redisplay before |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4905 a new cursor position has been computed. */ |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4906 && w->cursor.vpos < XFASTINT (w->height)) |
25012 | 4907 { |
4908 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4909 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4910 | |
4911 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4912 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4913 | |
4914 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4915 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4916 } | |
4917 } | |
314 | 4918 } |
4919 | |
4920 do_pause: | |
4921 | |
25012 | 4922 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4923 return pause; |
4924 } | |
4925 | |
25012 | 4926 |
4927 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4928 |
21514 | 4929 int |
764 | 4930 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4931 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4932 { |
4933 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4934 int window_size; | |
4935 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4936 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4937 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4938 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4939 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4940 register int i; |
764 | 4941 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4942 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4943 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4944 | |
4945 if (!current_matrix) | |
4946 abort (); | |
4947 | |
4948 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4949 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4950 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4951 changed_lines = 0; |
4952 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4953 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4954 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4955 { |
4956 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4957 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4958 return 0; |
25012 | 4959 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4960 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4961 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4962 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4963 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4964 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4965 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4966 } |
314 | 4967 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4968 { |
25012 | 4969 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4970 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4971 } |
314 | 4972 |
4973 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4974 { | |
4975 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4976 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4977 } |
4978 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4979 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4980 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4981 } |
4982 | |
4983 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4984 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4985 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4986 return 1; |
4987 | |
764 | 4988 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4989 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4990 | |
4991 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4992 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4993 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4994 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4995 | |
4996 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4997 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4998 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4999 && (window_size >= |
5000 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 5001 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 5002 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
5003 return 0; | |
5004 | |
25012 | 5005 if (window_size < 2) |
5006 return 0; | |
5007 | |
764 | 5008 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 5009 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
5010 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 5011 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
5012 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
5013 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
5014 | |
5015 return 0; | |
5016 } | |
25012 | 5017 |
5018 | |
5019 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
5020 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
5021 | |
5022 static int | |
5023 count_blanks (r, len) | |
5024 struct glyph *r; | |
5025 int len; | |
314 | 5026 { |
25012 | 5027 int i; |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5028 |
25012 | 5029 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) |
5030 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
5031 break; | |
5032 | |
5033 return i; | |
314 | 5034 } |
25012 | 5035 |
5036 | |
5037 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
5038 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
5039 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 5040 |
5041 static int | |
25012 | 5042 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
5043 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 5044 { |
25012 | 5045 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
5046 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
5047 | |
5048 while (p1 < end1 | |
5049 && p2 < end2 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
5050 && GLYPH_CHAR_AND_FACE_EQUAL_P (p1, p2)) |
25012 | 5051 ++p1, ++p2; |
5052 | |
5053 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 5054 } |
5055 | |
25012 | 5056 |
314 | 5057 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 5058 |
314 | 5059 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5060 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 5061 |
25012 | 5062 |
5063 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
5064 | |
314 | 5065 static void |
25012 | 5066 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
5067 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 5068 int vpos; |
5069 { | |
25012 | 5070 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 5071 int tem; |
5072 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 5073 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
5074 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
5075 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
5076 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
5077 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5078 int write_spaces_p = must_write_spaces; |
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5079 int colored_spaces_p = (FACE_FROM_ID (frame, DEFAULT_FACE_ID)->background |
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5080 != FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR); |
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5081 |
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5082 if (colored_spaces_p) |
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5083 write_spaces_p = 1; |
25012 | 5084 |
5085 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
5086 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 5087 { |
25012 | 5088 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
5089 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
5090 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 5091 } |
5092 else | |
25012 | 5093 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
5094 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5095 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5096 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 5097 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
5098 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 5099 { |
25012 | 5100 obody = 0; |
314 | 5101 olen = 0; |
5102 } | |
5103 else | |
5104 { | |
25012 | 5105 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
5106 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5107 | |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5108 if (!current_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 5109 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5110 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5111 if (!write_spaces_p) |
25012 | 5112 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 5113 olen--; |
5114 } | |
5115 else | |
5116 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5117 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5118 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5119 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 5120 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
5121 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5122 } |
5123 } | |
5124 | |
25012 | 5125 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
5126 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5127 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
5128 | |
5129 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
5130 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 5131 { |
5132 nlen = 0; | |
5133 goto just_erase; | |
5134 } | |
5135 | |
25012 | 5136 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
5137 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5138 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
5139 | |
5140 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
5141 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
5142 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5143 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5144 if (!write_spaces_p) |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5145 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5146 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5147 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5148 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5149 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5150 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5151 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5152 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5153 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5154 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5155 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5156 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5157 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5158 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5159 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5160 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5161 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5162 } |
28682
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5163 else |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5164 /* Make sure we are in the right row, otherwise cursor movement |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5165 with cmgoto might use `ch' in the wrong row. */ |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5166 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5167 |
25012 | 5168 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
5169 return; | |
5170 } | |
314 | 5171 |
5172 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
5173 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 5174 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 5175 { |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5176 if (!write_spaces_p) |
25012 | 5177 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 5178 nlen--; |
5179 } | |
5180 else | |
5181 { | |
25012 | 5182 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
5183 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
5184 all the way across. */ | |
5185 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
5186 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5187 } |
5188 | |
5189 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
5190 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
5191 { | |
25012 | 5192 int i, j; |
5193 | |
5194 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
5195 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 5196 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
5197 { | |
25012 | 5198 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 5199 { |
25012 | 5200 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
5201 j = i + 1; | |
5202 while (j < nlen | |
5203 && (j >= olen | |
5204 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
5205 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
5206 ++j; | |
5207 | |
5208 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 5209 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 5210 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
5211 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 5212 |
5213 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
5214 } | |
5215 } | |
5216 | |
5217 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
5218 if (olen > nlen) | |
5219 { | |
5220 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5221 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5222 } | |
5223 | |
25012 | 5224 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
5225 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 5226 return; |
5227 } | |
5228 | |
25012 | 5229 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
5230 characters in a row. */ | |
5231 | |
314 | 5232 if (!olen) |
5233 { | |
25012 | 5234 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
5235 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5236 if (write_spaces_p || desired_row->inverse_p) |
25012 | 5237 nsp = 0; |
5238 else | |
5239 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5240 | |
314 | 5241 if (nlen > nsp) |
5242 { | |
5243 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5244 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
5245 } | |
5246 | |
764 | 5247 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5248 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5249 return; |
5250 } | |
5251 | |
5252 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 5253 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5254 nsp = (desired_row->inverse_p || colored_spaces_p |
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5255 ? 0 |
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5256 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen)); |
25012 | 5257 |
5258 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
5259 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
5260 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 5261 |
5262 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
5263 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
33101
39cd5f99c67d
(update_frame_line): Handle case where spaces in
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32752
diff
changeset
|
5264 if (!write_spaces_p && osp + begmatch == olen) |
314 | 5265 { |
5266 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 5267 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
5268 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 5269 } |
5270 | |
5271 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
5272 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 5273 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 5274 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
5275 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5276 | |
5277 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
5278 op1 = obody + olen; | |
5279 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
5280 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 5281 while (op1 > op2 |
5282 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 5283 { |
5284 op1--; | |
5285 np1--; | |
5286 } | |
5287 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
5288 | |
5289 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
5290 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
5291 Is it worth it? */ | |
5292 | |
5293 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
5294 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 5295 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 5296 endmatch = 0; |
5297 | |
5298 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
5299 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
5300 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
5301 Is it worth it? */ | |
5302 | |
5303 if (nsp != osp | |
5304 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5305 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5306 { |
5307 begmatch = 0; | |
5308 endmatch = 0; | |
5309 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5310 } | |
5311 | |
5312 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5313 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5314 | |
5315 if (osp > nsp) | |
5316 { | |
5317 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5318 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5319 } | |
5320 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5321 { | |
5322 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5323 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5324 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5325 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5326 { | |
5327 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5328 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5329 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5330 } | |
5331 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5332 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5333 } |
5334 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5335 | |
5336 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5337 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5338 { | |
5339 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5340 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5341 { | |
5342 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5343 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5344 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5345 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5346 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5347 olen = 0; |
5348 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5349 } | |
5350 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5351 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5352 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5353 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5354 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5355 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5356 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5357 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5358 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5359 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5360 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5361 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5362 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5363 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5364 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5365 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5366 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5367 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5368 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5369 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5370 olen = nlen; |
5371 } | |
5372 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5373 { | |
5374 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5375 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5376 olen = nlen; | |
5377 } | |
5378 } | |
5379 | |
5380 just_erase: | |
5381 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5382 if (olen > nlen) | |
5383 { | |
5384 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5385 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5386 } | |
5387 | |
764 | 5388 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5389 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5390 } |
25012 | 5391 |
5392 | |
314 | 5393 |
25012 | 5394 /*********************************************************************** |
5395 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5396 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5397 | |
5398 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5399 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5400 boundaries. */ | |
5401 | |
5402 int | |
5403 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5404 struct window *w; | |
5405 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5406 { |
25012 | 5407 struct it it; |
5408 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5409 struct text_pos startp; | |
5410 int left_area_width; | |
5411 | |
5412 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5413 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5414 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5415 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5416 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5417 | |
5418 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5419 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5420 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5421 | |
5422 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5423 *y = it.current_y; | |
5424 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5425 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5426 } | |
5427 | |
5428 | |
5429 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5430 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5431 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5432 the string returned. */ | |
5433 | |
5434 Lisp_Object | |
5435 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5436 struct window *w; | |
30713
fee809f81f97
(mode_line_string): Declare parameter MODE_LINE_P.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30323
diff
changeset
|
5437 int x, y, mode_line_p; |
25012 | 5438 int *charpos; |
5439 { | |
5440 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5441 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5442 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5443 int x0; | |
5444 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5445 | |
5446 if (mode_line_p) | |
5447 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5448 else | |
25546 | 5449 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5450 |
5451 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5452 { |
25012 | 5453 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5454 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5455 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5456 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5457 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5458 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5459 |
5460 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5461 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5462 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5463 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5464 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5465 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5466 { | |
5467 string = glyph->object; | |
5468 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5469 break; | |
5470 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5471 } |
25012 | 5472 |
5473 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5474 } |
25012 | 5475 |
5476 | |
5477 /*********************************************************************** | |
5478 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5479 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5480 |
5481 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5482 |
493 | 5483 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5484 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5485 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5486 { |
5487 int width, height; | |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
5488 #ifndef USE_CRT_DLL |
314 | 5489 extern int errno; |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
5490 #endif |
314 | 5491 int old_errno = errno; |
5492 | |
764 | 5493 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5494 |
764 | 5495 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5496 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5497 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5498 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5499 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5500 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5501 | |
5502 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5503 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5504 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5505 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5506 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5507 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5508 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5509 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5510 break; |
5511 } | |
5512 } | |
5513 } | |
5514 | |
5515 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5516 errno = old_errno; | |
5517 } | |
5518 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5519 | |
5520 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5521 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5522 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5523 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5524 |
21514 | 5525 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5526 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5527 int safe; |
314 | 5528 { |
5529 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5530 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5531 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5532 |
314 | 5533 while (delayed_size_change) |
5534 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5535 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5536 |
5537 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5538 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5539 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5540 { |
25012 | 5541 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5542 |
764 | 5543 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5544 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5545 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5546 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5547 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5548 } |
5549 } | |
5550 } | |
5551 | |
5552 | |
764 | 5553 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5554 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5555 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5556 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5557 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5558 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5559 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5560 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5561 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5562 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5563 |
21514 | 5564 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5565 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5566 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5567 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5568 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5569 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5570 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5571 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5572 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5573 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5574 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5575 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5576 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5577 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5578 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5579 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5580 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5581 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5582 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5583 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5584 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5585 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5586 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5587 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5588 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5589 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5590 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5591 |
314 | 5592 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5593 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5594 { |
25012 | 5595 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5596 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5597 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5598 return; | |
5599 } | |
5600 | |
764 | 5601 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5602 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5603 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5604 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5605 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5606 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5607 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5608 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5609 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5610 | |
5611 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5612 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5613 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5614 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5615 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5616 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5617 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5618 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5619 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5620 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5621 return; |
5622 | |
15078 | 5623 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5624 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5625 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5626 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5627 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5628 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5629 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5630 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5631 |
25012 | 5632 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5633 { |
25012 | 5634 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5635 { |
25012 | 5636 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5637 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5638 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5639 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5640 (newheight | |
5641 - 1 | |
5642 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5643 0); | |
5644 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5645 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5646 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5647 } |
5648 else | |
764 | 5649 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5650 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5651 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5652 | |
5653 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5654 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5655 } |
5656 | |
25012 | 5657 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5658 { |
25012 | 5659 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5660 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5661 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5662 | |
5663 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5664 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5665 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5666 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5667 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5668 } |
5669 | |
25012 | 5670 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5671 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5672 | |
5673 { | |
5674 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5675 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5676 | |
5677 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5678 &text_area_height); | |
5679 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5680 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5681 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5682 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5683 } | |
5684 | |
5685 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5686 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5687 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5688 |
5689 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5690 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5691 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5692 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5693 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5694 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5695 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5696 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5697 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5698 } |
25012 | 5699 |
5700 | |
314 | 5701 |
25012 | 5702 /*********************************************************************** |
5703 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5704 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5705 | |
5706 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5707 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5708 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5709 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5710 (file) | |
5711 Lisp_Object file; | |
5712 { | |
5713 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5714 termscript = 0; | |
5715 | |
5716 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5717 { | |
5718 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5719 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5720 if (termscript == 0) | |
5721 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5722 } | |
5723 return Qnil; | |
5724 } | |
5725 | |
5726 | |
314 | 5727 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5728 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5729 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5730 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5731 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5732 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5733 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5734 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5735 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5736 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5737 fflush (stdout); |
5738 if (termscript) | |
5739 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5740 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5741 termscript); |
314 | 5742 fflush (termscript); |
5743 } | |
5744 return Qnil; | |
5745 } | |
5746 | |
25012 | 5747 |
314 | 5748 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5749 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5750 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5751 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5752 (arg) | |
5753 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5754 { | |
493 | 5755 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5756 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5757 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5758 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5759 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5760 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5761 fflush (stdout); |
5762 } | |
5763 else | |
5764 bitch_at_user (); | |
5765 | |
5766 return Qnil; | |
5767 } | |
5768 | |
21514 | 5769 void |
314 | 5770 bitch_at_user () |
5771 { | |
5772 if (noninteractive) | |
5773 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5774 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5775 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5776 else | |
5777 ring_bell (); | |
5778 fflush (stdout); | |
5779 } | |
5780 | |
25012 | 5781 |
5782 | |
5783 /*********************************************************************** | |
5784 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5785 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5786 | |
314 | 5787 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5788 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5789 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5790 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5791 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5792 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5793 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5794 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5795 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5796 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5797 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5798 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5799 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5800 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5801 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5802 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5803 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5804 | |
5805 { | |
5806 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5807 sec = (int) duration; | |
5808 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5809 } | |
314 | 5810 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5811 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5812 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5813 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5814 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5815 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5816 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5817 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5818 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5819 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5820 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5821 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5822 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5823 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5824 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5825 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5826 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5827 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5828 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5829 return Qnil; |
5830 | |
650 | 5831 { |
5832 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5833 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5834 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5835 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5836 } | |
587 | 5837 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5838 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5839 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5840 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5841 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5842 immediate_quit = 1; |
5843 QUIT; | |
5844 | |
5845 #ifdef VMS | |
5846 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5847 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5848 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5849 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5850 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5851 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5852 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5853 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5854 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5855 |
314 | 5856 while (1) |
5857 { | |
554 | 5858 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5859 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5860 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5861 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5862 break; |
5863 } | |
5864 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5865 sleep (sec); | |
5866 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5867 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5868 | |
5869 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5870 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5871 | |
5872 return Qnil; | |
5873 } | |
5874 | |
25012 | 5875 |
650 | 5876 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5877 it does the redisplay. | |
5878 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5879 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5880 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5881 |
5882 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5883 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5884 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5885 { |
650 | 5886 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5887 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5888 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5889 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5890 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5891 return Qnil; |
650 | 5892 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5893 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5894 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5895 | |
673 | 5896 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5897 return Qt; | |
5898 | |
314 | 5899 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5900 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5901 #endif |
5902 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5903 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5904 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5905 | |
314 | 5906 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5907 } | |
5908 | |
25012 | 5909 |
650 | 5910 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5911 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5912 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5913 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5914 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5915 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5916 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5917 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5918 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5919 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5920 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5921 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5922 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5923 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5924 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5925 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5926 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5927 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5928 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5929 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5930 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5931 | |
5932 { | |
5933 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5934 sec = (int) duration; | |
5935 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5936 } | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5937 |
650 | 5938 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5939 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5940 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5941 #endif |
5942 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5943 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5944 } |
25012 | 5945 |
5946 | |
314 | 5947 |
25012 | 5948 /*********************************************************************** |
5949 Other Lisp Functions | |
5950 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5951 | |
5952 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5953 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5954 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5955 add length checks). */ | |
5956 | |
5957 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5958 | |
5959 | |
5960 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5961 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5962 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5963 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5964 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5965 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5966 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5967 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5968 the current state.\n") | |
5969 () | |
5970 { | |
5971 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5972 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5973 int n; | |
5974 | |
5975 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5976 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5977 { | |
5978 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5979 goto changed; | |
5980 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5981 goto changed; | |
5982 } | |
5983 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5984 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5985 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5986 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5987 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5988 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5989 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5990 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5991 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5992 continue; | |
5993 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5994 goto changed; | |
5995 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5996 goto changed; | |
5997 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5998 goto changed; | |
5999 } | |
6000 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
6001 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
6002 return Qnil; | |
6003 changed: | |
6004 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
6005 n = 1; | |
6006 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
6007 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
6008 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 6009 n += 3; |
6010 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
6011 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
6012 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
6013 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
6014 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
6015 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
6016 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
6017 { | |
6018 *vecp++ = frame; | |
6019 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
6020 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
6021 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 6022 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
6023 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 6024 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
6025 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
6026 continue; | |
6027 *vecp++ = buf; | |
6028 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
6029 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
6030 } | |
6031 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
6032 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
6033 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
6034 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
6035 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
6036 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
6037 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
6038 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
6039 abort (); | |
6040 return Qt; | |
6041 } | |
6042 | |
6043 | |
6044 | |
6045 /*********************************************************************** | |
6046 Initialization | |
6047 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6048 | |
314 | 6049 char *terminal_type; |
6050 | |
25012 | 6051 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
6052 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
6053 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 6054 |
21514 | 6055 void |
314 | 6056 init_display () |
6057 { | |
6058 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
6059 extern int display_arg; | |
6060 #endif | |
6061 | |
25012 | 6062 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
6063 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
6064 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
6065 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
6066 | |
314 | 6067 meta_key = 0; |
6068 inverse_video = 0; | |
6069 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
6070 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
6071 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6072 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6073 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6074 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 6075 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6076 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6077 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6078 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6079 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6080 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6081 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6082 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 6083 |
6084 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6085 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6086 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6087 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6088 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6089 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6090 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6091 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6092 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6093 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6094 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 6095 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6096 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6097 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6098 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6099 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6100 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6101 ) |
314 | 6102 { |
6103 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
6104 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
6105 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
6106 #else | |
6107 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
6108 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6109 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6110 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 6111 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6112 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6113 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6114 #endif |
25012 | 6115 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 6116 return; |
6117 } | |
6118 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
6119 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6120 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6121 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6122 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
6123 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6124 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 6125 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6126 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6127 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6128 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6129 |
32752
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6130 #ifdef macintosh |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6131 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6132 { |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6133 Vwindow_system = intern ("mac"); |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6134 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6135 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6136 return; |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6137 } |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6138 #endif /* macintosh */ |
923b8d6d8277
Initial check-in: changes for building Emacs under Mac OS.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32468
diff
changeset
|
6139 |
314 | 6140 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
6141 if (! isatty (0)) | |
6142 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6143 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 6144 exit (1); |
6145 } | |
6146 | |
6147 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
6148 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
6149 if (!terminal_type) | |
6150 { | |
6151 #ifdef VMS | |
6152 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
6153 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
6154 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
6155 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
6156 #else | |
6157 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
6158 #endif | |
6159 exit (1); | |
6160 } | |
6161 | |
6162 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 6163 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 6164 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
6165 { | |
6166 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
6167 char *p; | |
6168 | |
6169 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
6170 | |
6171 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
6172 if (isupper (*p)) | |
6173 *p = tolower (*p); | |
6174 | |
6175 terminal_type = new; | |
6176 } | |
25012 | 6177 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 6178 |
6179 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 6180 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6181 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6182 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6183 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6184 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6185 |
25012 | 6186 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
6187 | |
6188 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
6189 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
6190 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6191 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6192 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6193 |
25012 | 6194 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6195 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 6196 |
6197 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
6198 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6199 if (initialized) | |
6200 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
6201 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
6202 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 6203 |
6204 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
6205 if (initialized | |
6206 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6207 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6208 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6209 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6210 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6211 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6212 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6213 #endif |
25012 | 6214 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6215 { |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6216 /* For the initial frame, we don't have any way of knowing what |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6217 are the foreground and background colors of the terminal. */ |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6218 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME(); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6219 |
26902
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6220 FRAME_FOREGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_FG_COLOR; |
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6221 FRAME_BACKGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR; |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6222 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6223 } |
314 | 6224 } |
25012 | 6225 |
6226 | |
314 | 6227 |
25012 | 6228 /*********************************************************************** |
6229 Blinking cursor | |
6230 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6231 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6232 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6233 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6234 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6235 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6236 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6237 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6238 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6239 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 6240 { |
6241 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
6242 output routines. */ | |
6243 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
6244 { | |
6245 if (NILP (window)) | |
6246 window = selected_window; | |
6247 else | |
6248 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
6249 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6250 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 6251 } |
6252 | |
6253 return Qnil; | |
6254 } | |
6255 | |
6256 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6257 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6258 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
26499
10af169a628b
(Finternal_show_cursor_p): Fix doc string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26334
diff
changeset
|
6259 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW.\n\ |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6260 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6261 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6262 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6263 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6264 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6265 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6266 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6267 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6268 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6269 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6270 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6271 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6272 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6273 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6274 |
25012 | 6275 |
6276 /*********************************************************************** | |
6277 Initialization | |
6278 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6279 | |
21514 | 6280 void |
314 | 6281 syms_of_display () |
6282 { | |
764 | 6283 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 6284 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6285 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 6286 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
6287 defsubr (&Sding); | |
6288 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
6289 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
6290 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6291 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6292 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 6293 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
6294 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6295 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6296 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6297 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6298 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
6299 Qredisplay_dont_pause = intern ("redisplay-dont-pause"); |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
6300 staticpro (&Qredisplay_dont_pause); |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6301 |
314 | 6302 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
6303 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 6304 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
6305 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 6306 |
314 | 6307 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 6308 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 6309 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 6310 |
314 | 6311 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6312 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6313 |
314 | 6314 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6315 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6316 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6317 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6318 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6319 |
314 | 6320 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6321 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6322 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6323 |
314 | 6324 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6325 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6326 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6327 |
314 | 6328 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6329 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6330 |
314 | 6331 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6332 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6333 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6334 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6335 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6336 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6337 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6338 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6339 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6340 | |
6341 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6342 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6343 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6344 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6345 | |
25012 | 6346 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6347 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6348 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6349 | |
314 | 6350 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6351 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6352 if (noninteractive) | |
6353 #endif | |
6354 { | |
6355 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6356 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6357 } | |
6358 } |